Home

User's Guide - 4 Office Technical Support

1. Canceling an e mail When using the ADF touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears When using the scanner glass touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears or while Scan the Next Page Finish the Job appears Understanding e mail options Recipients This option lets you enter the destination of your e mail You may enter multiple e mail addresses Subject This option lets you enter a subject line for your e mail Message This option lets you enter a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment File Name This option lets you customize the attachment file name Original Size This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to e mail Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting The e mail screen appears with your new setting displayed When Original Size is set to Mixed Letter Legal you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes When Original Size is set to Auto Size Sense the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document Resolution Adjusts the output quality of your e mail Increasing the image resolution increases the e mail file size and the time needed to scan your original document Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the e mail file size Color This option sets the output color for the scanned image Touch to enable or disable color E mailing 105 Content T
2. Entering or waking from Hibernate Mode The indicator light is illuminated solid green Sleep button is illuminated blinking amber Operating in Hibernate Mode TThe indicator light is unilluminated Sleep button is blinking amber in pulsing pattern 4 Keypad Lets you enter numbers letters or symbols on the display 5 Submit Lets you submit changes made in the printer settings 6 Stop Cancel Stops all printer activity Note A list of option is displayed once Stopped appears on the display 7 Home Lets you navigate back to the home screen 8 Card reader Limits the use of certain printer functions to authenticated users Note The card reader may not be available on all printer models 9 USB port Lets you insert a USB flash drive to send data or to save scanned images Learning about the printer 14 Understanding the home screen When the printer is turned on the display shows a basic screen referred to as the home screen Touch the home screen buttons to initiate an action such as copying faxing or scanning to open the menu screen or to respond to messages Note Buttons appearing on the home screen may vary depending on home screen customization settings E mail fiookmarks Fax Copy Sasrch xt lt re A NT x e E 1003 Change Cop tc Held Jobs y ete ute Language Sha a e a Ready Display item Description Copy Opens the Copy menus E
3. Factory Defaults Do Not Restore Restore Now Copy Settings menu Menu item Description Content Type Text Photo Text Graphics Photo Determines how the scanner while in Idle state reacts to a long press of the Sleep button Note Do nothing is the factory default setting Returns the printer settings to the factory default settings Notes Do Not Restore is the factory default setting Do Not Restore keeps the user defined settings Restore Now returns all printer settings to the factory default settings except Network Ports menu settings All downloads stored in RAM are deleted Downloads stored in flash memory or ona printer hard disk are not affected Specifies the type of content contained in the copy job Notes Text Photo is the factory default setting Text Photo is used when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Text is used when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphics is used when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Photo is used when the document being scanned is mostly a photo or an image Understanding printer menus 172 Menu item Description Content Source Specifies the source of content in the copy job Color Laser Notes Inkjet Magazine Color Laser is the factory default setting Color Laser is used when the original Press docu
4. Magazine is used when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper is used when the original document is from a newspaper Press is used when the original document was printed using a printing press Other is used when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Color Specifies whether prints are in grayscale or color Gray Note Gray is the factory default setting Color Understanding printer menus 199 Resolution Specifies the resolution of the scan in dots per inch dpi 150 Note 150 is the factory default setting 200 300 400 600 75 Darkness Lightens or darkens the output 1 9 Note 5 is the factory default setting Orientation Specifies the orientation of the scanned image Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Original Size Specifies the paper size of the document Letter Note Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default Legal setting Executive Tabloid Folio Statement Universal 4x6in 3xbin Business Card Custom Scan Size x A3 A4 A5 Oficio Mexico JIS B4 JIS B5 Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes Sides Duplex Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on a page Off Long edge Short edge Notes e Off is the factory default setting Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape Short
5. Note Formatting deletes all the files stored on the printer hard disk Empty the hole punch box 1 Empty the hole punch box For instructions on emptying the hole punch box from the printer control panel touch More Information 2 Reinsert the hole punch box into the finisher and then touch Continue to clear the message Error reading USB drive Remove drive An unsupported USB device has been inserted Remove the USB device and then install a supported one Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator The fax partition appears to be corrupted Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message e Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer If the message appears again then contact your system support person Some held jobs were not restored Touch Continue to delete the specified job Note Held jobs that are not restored stay on the hard disk and are inaccessible Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator The printer is in Fax Server mode but the Fax Server setup has not been completed Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message Complete the Fax Server setup If the message appears again contact your system support person Troubleshooting 256 Fax Station Name not set up The Fax Station Name has not been entered Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly Try one or more of t
6. Paper tray problems Try one or more of the following MAKE SURE THE PAPER IS LOADED CORRECTLY 1 Open the paper tray 2 Checkfor paper jams or misfeeds 3 Make sure the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper 4 Make sure the paper tray closes properly RESET THE PRINTER Turn the printer off wait about 10 seconds and then turn the printer on MAKE SURE THE PAPER TRAY IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY If the paper tray is listed on the menu settings page but paper jams when it enters or exits the tray then it may not be properly installed Reinstall the paper tray For more information see the hardware setup documentation that came with the paper tray or go to http support lexmark com to view the paper tray instruction sheet 2 000 sheet drawer problems CHECK THE DRAWER CONNECTION Make sure the 2 000 sheet drawer is properly connected to the printer Troubleshooting 285 LOAD PAPER If the tray is empty then load paper in the tray or feeder CLEAR ANY JAMS Open the side door of the tray or feeder and then remove any jammed paper AVOID PAPER JAMS Flexthe paper Make sure the drawer is properly installed Make sure paper is loaded correctly Make sure the paper stack you load does not exceed the maximum stack height indicated in the tray Make sure the paper or specialty media meets specifications and is not damaged Make sure the guides are positioned correctly for the paper size loaded
7. e Standard Suitable for most documents Fine Recommended for documents with small print Super fine Recommended for original documents with fine detail Ultra fine Recommended for documents with pictures or photos Darkness This option adjusts how light or dark your faxes will turn out in relation to the original document Color This option enables or disables color in faxing Page Setup This option lets you change the Sides Duplex Orientation and Binding Sides Duplex Specifies if the original document is simplex printed on one page or duplex printed on both sides This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax Orientation Specifies the orientation ofthe original document and then changes Sides and Binding to match the orientation Binding Specifies if the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge side Scan Preview This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the fax When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Faxing 119 Advanced Options Touching this button lets you change Delayed Send Advanced Imaging Custom Job Transmission Log Edge Erase and ADF Skew Fix settings Delayed Send This lets you send a fax at a later time or date After setting up your fax touch Delayed Send enter the time and date you would like to send your fax and then touch Done This setting
8. lower the Sharpness setting On the Copy screen make sure no scaling is being selected When the text is light or disappearing From the Copy screen navigate to Content gt Text gt 4 gt select the appropriate source for the original document being copied gt From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options Advanced Imaging Sharpness increase the current setting From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options Advanced Imaging Background removal and then reduce the current setting From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options Advanced Imaging Contrast increase the current setting From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options gt Advanced Imaging gt Shadow detail gt reduce the current setting When the output appears washed out or overexposed On the Copy screen make sure the Content Type and Source settings are appropriate for the document being scanned From the Copy screen adjust the Darkness setting From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options gt Advanced Imaging gt Shadow detail gt reduce the current setting From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options Advanced Imaging Background removal reduce the current setting Partial document or photo copies These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper
9. Heavy Light Light Weight Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded Light Note Light is the factory default setting Heavy Weight Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded Heavy Note Heavy is the factory default setting Rough Cotton Weight Specifies the relative weight of the cotton paper loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Heavy Light Custom x Weight Specifies the relative weight of the custom paper loaded Normal Notes Heavy Light Normal is the factory default setting L Settings appear only if the custom type is supported J Paper Loading menu Menu item Description Card Stock Loading Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that Off specify Card Stock as the paper type Duplex Note Off is the factory default setting Notes Duplex sets the printer default to 2 sided printing for every print job unless 1 sided printing is selected from Print Properties ut If Duplex is selected then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit including 1 sided print jobs Understanding printer menus 141 Menu item Description Recycled Loading Off Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Recycled as the paper type Duplex Note Off is the factory default setting Glossy Loading Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that Off specify Glossy as the paper type Duplex Note Off is the fact
10. Internet Connect AirPort 7 From the Network pop up menu select the name of your wireless network Additional printer setup 45 Configure your computer to use the printer wirelessly To print on a network printer each Macintosh user must install a custom PostScript Printer Description PPD file and create a printer in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility 1 Install a PPD file on the computer a m OQ nn c f Insert the Software and Documentation CD and then double click the installer package for the printer Follow the instructions on the computer screen Select a Destination and then click Continue From the Easy Install screen click Install Type the user password and then click OK All necessary software applications are installed on the computer Click Close when installation is complete 2 Add the printer a For IP printing In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later 1 From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences Print amp Fax 2 Click and then click the IP tab 3 Type the IP address of your printer in the Address field and then click Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier 1 From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Utilities 2 Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center 3 From the Printer List choose Add and then click IP Printer 4 Type the IP address of your printer in the Address field and then click Add For AppleTalk printing Note Make sure AppleTalk
11. Photo Film Use when the original document is a photo from film Magazine Use when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper Use when the original document is from a newspaper Press Use when the original document was printed using a printing press Other Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Scan Preview This option displays the first page of the original document before it is scanned completely When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Scanning to an FTP address 125 Advanced Options Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings Advanced Imaging This lets you adjust the Background Removal Color Balance Color Dropout Contrast JPEG Quality Negative Image Mirror Image Scan edge to edge Shadow Detail Sharpness and Temperature image output settings before you send the document Custom Job Job Build This lets you combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job Transmission Log This lets you print the transmission log or transmission error log Scan Preview This lets you display the first page of an image before it is included in the FTP file When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Edge Erase This lets you eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area a
12. Remove the paper from the specified bin The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing If removing the paper does not clear the message then touch Continue Restore Held Jobs Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to restore all held jobs stored on the printer hard disk Touch Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored Scanner automatic feeder cover open Close the ADF cover Slide finisher to the left Slide the mailbox or finisher to the left until it clicks into place Supply needed to complete job A supply needed to complete the job is missing Touch Cancel to clear the message Unsupported disk An unsupported disk has been inserted Remove the unsupported disk and then install a supported one Troubleshooting 261 Tray x paper size unsupported The paper size in the specified tray is unsupported Replace it with a supported paper size 31 xx Missing or defective color cartridge Try one or more of the following 1 Remove and reinstall the specified print cartridge For instructions on removing a print cartridge touch More Information 2 Touch Continue to clear the message Note If the message is not cleared then replace the defective print cartridge 32 xx color cartridge part number unsupported by device 1 Remove the unsupported print cartridge and then install a supported one For instructions on removing a print cartridge touch M
13. All receive ae i receiving fax jobs into equal amounts Mostly receive Ps y Mostly sent specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs All send specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs Allreceive specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs Mostly receive specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs Cancel Faxes Specifies whether or not the printer cancels fax jobs Allow Don t Allow Caller ID Specifies type of caller ID being used On Off Alternate Fax number masking Specifies the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number Off Note The number of characters masked is determined by the Digits to mask From left setting From right Digits to mask Specifies the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number 0 58 Understanding printer menus 179 Menu item Description Fax Cover Page Configures the fax cover page Fax Cover Page Note Off by default is the factory default setting for all Fax Cover Page options Off by default On by default Never use Always use Include to field On Off Include from field Off On From Include Message field Off On Message Include Logo Off On Include Footer x Footer x Fax Send Settings Menu item Description Resolution Specifies quality in dots per inch dpi A higher resolution gives greater print quality Standard but increases the fax tran
14. If Ready does not appear then turn the printer off and contact Customer Support Error message about reading USB drive appears Make sure the USB drive is supported For information regarding tested and approved USB flash memory devices see Printing from a flash drive on page 84 Print jobs do not print Try one or more of the following MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS READY TO PRINT Make sure Ready appears on the display before sending a print job Troubleshooting 270 CHECK IF THE STANDARD EXIT BIN IS FULL Remove the paper stack from the standard exit bin CHECK IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY Load paper in the tray MAKE SURE THE CORRECT PRINTER SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED Verify that you are using the correct printer software e f the printer is connected to your computer through a USB port then make sure you are running a supported operating system and using a compatible printer software MAKE SURE THE INTERNAL PRINT SERVER IS WORKING PROPERLY Make sure the internal print server is properly installed and that the printer is connected to the network e Print a network setup page and check that the status shows Connected If the status is Not Connected then check the network cables and then try printing the network setup page again Contact your system support person to make sure the network is functioning correctly The printer software is available on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com MAKE SURE YOU ARE
15. On Off Enables access to the Fax Job log Enable Call Log On Off Enables access to the Fax Call log Log Output Bin Standard Bin Specifies the output bin where fax logs are printed Bin x Speaker Settings Speaker Mode Specifies the mode of the speaker On until Connected Notes Always On Always Off Onuntil Connected is the factory default setting A sound is issued until the fax connection is made Always On turns the speaker on e Always Off turns the speaker off Speaker Volume High Low Controls the volume setting Note High is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 186 Menu item Ringer Volume Answer On All Rings Single Ring Only Double Ring Only Triple Ring Only Single or Double Rings Only Single or Triple Rings Only Double or Triple Rings Only Description Controls the fax speaker ringer volume Note On is the factory default setting Specifies ring patterns when device is answering calls Note All Rings is the factory default setting Menu item Description M Fax Mode Fax Server Setup menu Fax Server mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission Fax Server Setup To Format Lets you enter the information using the virtual keyboard on the printer touch Reply Address PSU Subject Message SMTP Setup Specifies SMTP setup information Primary SMTP Gateway Specifies SMTP serve
16. Understanding printer menus 181 Content Source Color Laser Menu item Description Specifies how the output is produced Notes Inkjet Magazine Color Laser is the factory default setting Color Laser is used when the original Press document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Laser Black White is used when the original document was printed using a f black white laser printer Photo Film E m NS Newspaper Inkjet is used when the original document was printed using a inkjet printer Other Photo Film is used when the original document is a photo from film Magazine is used when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper is used when the original document is from a newspaper Pressis used when the original document was printed using a printing press Other is used when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Darkness Lightens or darkens the output 1 9 Note 5 is the factory default setting Dial Prefix Lets you enter a dialing prefix such as 99 A numeric entry field is provided Dialing Prefix Rules Prefix Rule x Automatic Redial 0 9 Establishes a dialing prefix rule Specifies the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number Note 5 is the factory default setting Redial Frequency 1 200 Specifies the number of minutes between redials Behind a PABX No Yes Enables switchboard blind dialing without a
17. Use Device SMTP Credentials Use Session User ID amp Password Use Session E mail address amp Password Prompt User Device Userid None is the factory default setting for Device and User Initiated E mail Device Userid and Device Password are used to log in to the SMTP server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected Device Password Kerberos 5 Realm NTLM Domain Security menu Editing Security Setups menu Menu item Description Edit Backup Password Creates a backup password Note This menu item will only appear if a backup password exists Edit Building Blocks Edits the Internal Accounts NTLM various Setups Password and PIN Edit Security Templates Adds or edits a Security Template Edit Access Controls Controls access to printer menus firmware updates held jobs and other access points Understanding printer menus 160 Miscellaneous Security Settings menu Login Restrictions Login failures Failure time frame Lockout time Panel Login Timeout Remote Login Timeout Menu item Description Limits the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control panel before all users are locked out Notes Login failures specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are locked out Settings range from 1 10 attempts is the factory default setting Failure time frame specifies the time frame during which failed login attem
18. Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly A list of installed options appears toward the bottom of the page If an option you installed is not listed then it is not installed correctly Remove the option and install it again e Network setup page If your printer is a network model and is attached to a network print a network setup page to verify the network connection This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration Additional printer setup 39 Printing a menu settings page From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Menu Settings Page Printing a network setup page If the printer is attached to a network then print a network setup page to verify the network connection This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration 1 From the home screen navigate to Reports Network Setup Page 2 Check the first section of the network setup page and confirm that the status is Connected If the status is Not Connected then the LAN drop may not be active or the network cable may be malfunctioning Consult a system support person for a solution and then print another network setup page Setting up the printer software Installing the printer software For Windows users 1 Close all open software programs 2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD Wait for the Welcome screen to appear If the CD does not lau
19. Use this to specify if the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge of the page Scan Preview This option displays the first page of the image before itis included in the e mail When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Advanced Options Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings ADF Skew Fix Use this to correct slight skew in the scanned image Advanced Imaging Use this to change or adjust Background Removal Color Balance Color Dropout Contrast JPEG Quality Mirror Image Negative Image Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail Sharpness and Temperature before scanning a document Custom Job Use this to combine multiple scan jobs into a single scan job Edge Erase Use this to remove smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or picka particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scanned image Transmission Log Use this to print the transmission log or transmission error log Scanning to a computer or flash drive 130 Understanding printer menus Menus list Supplies Replace Supply Cyan Cartridge Magenta Cartridge Yellow Cartridge Black Cartridge Separator Roll and Pick Assembly Waste Toner Bottle Fuser Transfer Module Staple Cartridge
20. add 4 Touch E mail It Using the address book 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to E mail gt Recipient s gt amp gt enter the name of recipient gt Browse shortcuts 4 Touch the name of the recipients To enter additional recipients touch Next address and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add or search the address book 5 Touch Done E mailing 103 Customizing e mail settings Adding e mail subject and message information 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides From the home screen touch E mail Type an e mail address Touch Options Subject Type the e mail subject Touch Done Message Type an e mail message o 0o 4 A Uu AB W N Touch Done E mail It Changing the output file type 1 Loadan original document faceup short
21. laquelle l quipement est connect Utilisez un parasurtenseur r pondant des caract ristiques Notices 313 nominales satisfaisantes et certifi parle laboratoire d assureurs UL Underwriter s Laboratories un autre laboratoire agr de type NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory ou un organisme de certification agr dans votre r gion ou pays Ceci pr vient tout endommagement de l quipement caus par les orages et autres surtensions lectriques Cet quipement utilise des prises de t l phone CA11A Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom nor does it provide any sort of warranty Above all it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted equipment of a different make or model nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom s network services This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom s 111 Emergency Service This equipment may not provide for the effective hand over of a call to another device connected to the same line This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that ma
22. needed to scan your original document Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size Page Setup This option lets you change the Sides Duplex Orientation and Binding Sides Duplex Specifies if the original document is simplex printed on one page or duplex printed on both sides This also identifies what needs to be scanned Orientation Specifies the orientation of the original document and then changes the Sides and Binding settings to match the orientation Binding Specifies if the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge side Content This option tells the printer the original document type and source Choose content type from Text Text Photo Photo or Graphic Text Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphic Use when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Text Photo Use when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Photo Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image Choose content source from Color Laser Black White Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press or Other Color Laser Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Use when the original document was printed using a black white laser printer Inkjet Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer
23. pdf Secure PDF pdf TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps Menu item Description Specifies the format of the FTP file Note PDF pdf is the factory default setting PDF Version 1 5 1 6 A la 1 2 13 14 Sets the version level of the PDF file for FTP Note 1 5 is the factory default setting Content Type Text Graphics Text Photo Photo Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to FTP Notes Text Photo is the factory default setting Text Photo is used when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Text is used when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphics is used when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Photo is used when the document being scannedis mostly a photo oran image Understanding printer menus 194 Menu item Description Content Source Specifies how content will be produced Color Laser Notes Inkjet Magazine Color Laser is the factory default setting Color Laser is used when the original Press document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Laser Black White is used when the original document was printed using a f black white laser printer Photo Film Xe D a Tae Newspaper Inkjet is used when the original document was printed using a inkjet printer Other Photo Film is used when the original document is a p
24. printing only For duplex two sided printing the minimum size is 139 7 x 210 mm 5 50 x 8 27 in Paper size Dimensions Standard Optional Optional Multipurpose Duplexer 550 sheet 550 sheet 2 000 sheet feeder tray Tray 1 tray tray A4 210 x 297 mm JV JV v v v 8 27 x 11 7 in A5 148x 210 mm JV JV X J J 5 83 x 8 27 in A6 105 x 148 mm X X X J X 4 13 x 5 83 in JIS B5 182x 257 mm J JV X v V 7 17 x 10 1 in Letter 215 9 x 279 4 mm V i J J 8 5 x 11 in Legal 215 9 x 355 6 mm y J J JV JV 8 5 x 14 in Executive 184 2 x 266 7 mm Jf J X J J 7 25 x 10 5 in Oficio M xico 215 9 x 340 4 mm Jf J X J J 8 5 x 13 4 in Supported by X790 models only This formats the envelope size setting for 215 9 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 in unless the size is specified by the software application Paper and specialty media guidelines 76 Dimensions Standard Optional Optional Multipurpose Duplexer 550 sheet 550 sheet 2 000 sheet feeder tray Tray 1 tray tray Folio 215 9 x 330 2 mm y JV X J J 8 5 x 13 in Statement 139 7 x 215 9 mm Jf v X J J 5 5 x 8 5 in Universal 148x210mmto Jf J X J J Note Turn size 215 2x355 6 mm sensing off to 5 83 x 8 27 in to support 8 5 x 14 in universal sizes 76 2x 127 mm X X X J X that are close to 3x 5 in to standard media 215 9x 355 6 sizes mm 8 5 x 14 i
25. see the software program Help topics How does the printer know what color to print When a user prints a document information describing the type and color of each object is sent to the printer The color information is passed through color conversion tables that translate the color into the appropriate amounts of cyan magenta yellow and black toner needed to produce the desired color The object information determines the application of color conversion tables For example it is possible to apply one type of color conversion table to text while applying a different color conversion table to photographic images Should I use PostScript or PCL emulation printer software What settings should I use for the best color The PostScript driver is strongly recommended for best color quality The default settings in the PostScript driver provide the preferred color quality for the majority of printouts Why doesn t the printed color match the color I see on the computer screen The color conversion tables used in Auto Color Correction mode generally approximate the colors of a standard computer monitor However because of technology differences that exist between printers and monitors there are many colors that can also be affected by monitor variations and lighting conditions For recommendations on how the printer color sample pages may be useful in solving certain color matching problems see the question How can I match a particular colo
26. then the printer reprints the jammed page if enough printer memory is available Avoiding jams Paper tray recommendations Make sure the paper lies flat in the tray e Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing Do not load a tray while the printer is printing Load it prior to printing or wait for a prompt to load it Do not load too much paper Make sure the stack height does not exceed the indicated maximum height Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing too tightly against the paper or envelopes Push the tray in firmly after loading paper Paper recommendations Use only recommended paper or specialty media Do not load wrinkled creased damp bent or curled paper Flex and straighten paper before loading it Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand Donot mix paper sizes weights or types in the same stack Make sure all sizes and types are set correctly in the printer control panel menus Store paper per manufacturer recommendations Understanding jam numbers and locations When a jam occurs a message indicating the jam location appears on the display Open doors and covers and remove trays to access jam locations To resolve any paper jam message you must clear all jammed paper from the paper path Clearing jams 240 Area Jam numbers What to do 1 200 239 Open side do
27. 1 2 3 4 Turn the printer off Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Remove the specified bin Contact Customer Support Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the specified bin Reattach bin X y Try one or more of the following Turn the printer off and then back on Reattach the specified bins 1 Uu WN 6 Turn the printer off Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Remove the specified bins Reattach the bins Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet Turn the printer back on Remove the specified bins 1 2 3 4 Turn the printer off Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Remove the specified bins Contact Customer Support Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the specified bins Troubleshooting 260 Remove packaging material area namel Remove any remaining packaging material from the specified location Remove paper from standard output bin Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin Remove paper from bin x Remove the paper from the specified bin The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing If removing the paper does not clear the message then touch Continue Remove paper from all bins Output bins have reached their capacity Remove paper from all output bins to clear the message and continue printing Remove paper from linked bin set namel
28. 2 Grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out 3 Close the side door 4 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared 250 paper jam 1 Push the paper pick tab and then remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder Warning Potential Damage Pulling the paper out without pushing the paper pick tab first may cause the paper pick tab to break Clearing jams 246 2 Grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Reload paper into the multipurpose feeder and then adjust the paper guides 4 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared 280 289 paper jams 1 Remove all original documents from the ADF 2 Open the ADF cover 3 Grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 4 Close the ADF cover 5 Reload original documents into the ADF straighten the stack and then adjust the paper guide 6 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared Clearing jams 247 290 292 paper jams 290 paper jam Close the ADF cover 291 paper jam Close the scanner glass cover 292 paper jam Try one of more of the following Close the ADF cover Close the scanner cover Contact your system support system person 400 403 and 460 461 paper jams 1 Open the paper transport unit door 2 Firmly grasp t
29. ABCD ABCD MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE OR WORN PRINT CARTRIDGE Replace the worn or defective print cartridge Solving color quality problems This section helps answer some basic color related questions and describes how some of the features provided in the Quality Menu can be used to solve typical color problems FAQ about color printing What is RGB color Red green and blue light can be added together in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in nature For example red and green can be combined to create yellow Televisions and computer monitors create colors in this manner RGB color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of red green or blue needed to produce a certain color Troubleshooting 301 What is CMYK color Cyan magenta yellow and black inks or toners can be printed in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in nature For example cyan and yellow can be combined to create green Printing presses inkjet printers and color laser printers create colors in this manner CMYK color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of cyan magenta yellow and black needed to reproduce a particular color How is color specified in a document to be printed Software programs typically specify document color using RGB or CMYK color combinations Additionally they allow users to modify the color of each object in a document For more information
30. Apple menu choose System Preferences gt Print amp Fax 2 Select your printer and then click Options amp Supplies 3 Click Driver and then add any installed hardware options 4 Click OK In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier 1 From the Finder desktop choose Go Applications 2 Double click Utilities Print Center or Printer Setup Utility 3 Select the printer and then from the Printers menu choose Show Info 4 From the pop up menu choose Installable Options 5 Add any installed hardware options and then click Apply Changes Setting up wireless printing Note A Service Set Identifier SSID is a name assigned to a wireless network Wireless Encryption Protocol WEP and Wi Fi Protected Access WPA are types of security used on a network Information you will need to set up the printer on a wireless network Note Do not connect the installation or network cables until prompted to do so by the setup software Additional printer setup a e SSID The SSID is also referred to as the network name Wireless Mode or Network Mode The mode will be either infrastructure or ad hoc Channel for ad hoc networks The channel defaults to auto for infrastructure networks Some ad hoc networks will also require the auto setting Check with your system support person if you are not sure which channel to select Security Method There are three basic options for Security Method WEP key If your network uses
31. Between Copies Between Jobs Between Pages Between Copies inserts a blanksheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to On If Collate is set to Off then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages such as after all page 1 s and after all page 2 s Notes None is the factory default setting Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document for notes Separator Sheet Source Specifies the paper source for separator sheets Tray x Manual Feeder Notes Tray 1 is the factory default setting From the Paper menu Configure MP must beset to Cassette in order for Multipurpose Feeder to appear as a menu setting Blank Pages Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job Do Not Print Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Print Print Settings Setup menu Menu item Description Printer Language Sets the default printer language PS Emulation Notes PCL Emulation PS Emulation is the factory default setting PostScript emulation uses a PS interpreter for processing print jobs PCL Emulation uses a PCL interpreter for processing print jobs Setting a printer language default does not prevent a software program from sending print jobs that use another printer language
32. CMYK color conversion tables used in the printer Notes Selecting any setting prints the sample Color samples consist of a series of colored boxes along with the RGB or CMYK combination that creates the color observed These pages can be used to help decide which combinations to use to get the desired printed output From a browser window type the IP address of the printer to access a complete list of color sample pages from the Embedded Web Server Understanding printer menus 209 Menu item Description Manual Color Customizes the RGB color conversions RGB Image Notes Vivid sRGB Display sRGB Display is the factory default setting for RGB Image This applies a color conversion table to an output that matches the colors displayed on a computer Display True Black monitor SRGBVINId e SRGB Vivid is the factory default setting for RGB Text and RGB Graphics sRGB Vivid off applies a color table that increases saturation This is preferred for business RGB Text graphics and text Vivid e Vivid applies a color conversion table that produces brighter more saturated sRGB Display colors Display True Black Display True Black applies a color conversion table that uses only black toner for sRGB Vivid neutral gray colors Off Off turns off color conversion RGB Graphics Vivid sRGB Display Display True Black sRGB Vivid Off Manual Color Customizes the CMYK color conversions CMYK Image Notes US CMYK Euro
33. CMYK e US CMYK is the US factory default setting US CMYK applies a color conversion Vivid CMYK table that tries to produce output that matches SWOP color output Euro CMYK is the international factory default setting Euro CMYK applies a color ut conversion table that tries to produce output that matches EuroScale color output T Vivid CMYK increases color saturation for the US CMYK color conversion table Euro CMYK Offturns off color conversion Vivid CMYK Off CMYK Graphics US CMYK Euro CMYK Vivid CMYK Off Spot Color Replacement Allows users to create and save custom spot colors with corresponding CMYK values Color Adjust Initiates a recalibration of color conversion tables and allows the printer to make adjustments for color variations in output Notes Adjusting color starts when the menuis selected Adjusting appears on the display until the process is finished Color variations in output sometimes result from changeable conditions such as room temperature and humidity Color adjustments are made on printer algorithms Color alignment is also recalibrated in this process Understanding printer menus 210 Utilities menu Menu item Remove Held Jobs Confidential Held Not Restored All Description Removes confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk Notes Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer Bookmarks print jobs on flash drives
34. Close the side door of the printer 4 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared 230 paper jam 1 Open the side door of the printer A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 2 Slide the latch to open the duplex cover 3 Grasp the jammed paper and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 4 Close the duplex cover 5 Close the side door of the printer 6 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared Clearing jams 244 231 239 paper jams 1 Open the side door of the printer A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 2 Slidethe latch to open the duplex cover 3 Grasp the jammed paper and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 4 Close the duplex cover 5 Close the side door of the printer 6 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared 24x paper jam Paper jam in Tray 1 1 Open the side door 2 Grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out 3 Close the side door 4 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared Clearing jams 245 Paper jam in the optional trays 1 Open the side door of the specified optional tray
35. If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click or click Start and then click Run 3 Inthe Start Search or Run box type control printers 4 Press Enter or click OK The printer folder opens 5 Locate the printer that has changed Note If there is more than one copy of the printer then update all of them with the new IP address Right click the printer Click Properties gt Ports tab Select the port from the list and then click Configure Port Type the new IP address in the Printer Name or IP Address field Click OK Close O w ON Q For Macintosh users 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Additional printer setup 49 If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Note You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer 2 Add the printer e For IP printing In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later a From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences gt Print amp Fax b Click
36. Job Waiting Specifies if print jobs are removed from the print queue when they Off require unavailable printer options or custom settings These print On jobs are stored in a separate print queue so other jobs print normally When the missing information and or options are obtained the stored jobs print Notes Offis the factory default setting This menu item appears only if a non read only printer hard disk is installed This requirement ensures that stored jobs are not deleted if the printer loses power Understanding printer menus 204 Menu item Print Area Normal Fit to Page Whole Page Description Sets the logical and physical printable area Notes Normalis the factory default setting When attempting to print data in the non printable area defined by the Normal setting the printer clips the image at the boundary Fitto Page fits the page content into the selected paper size Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the non printable area defined by the Normal setting but the printer clips the image at the Normal setting boundary This setting affects only pages printed using a PCL 5e interpreter and has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL or PostScript interpreter Black Only Mode Off On Sets the printer to print text and graphics using only the black print cartridge Note Off is the factory default setting Download Target RAM Flash Disk Sets the storage l
37. Load envelopes with the flap side up and to the right Warning Potential Damage Never use envelopes with stamps clasps snaps windows coated linings or self stick adhesives These envelopes may severely damage the printer Notes Do notexceed the maximum stack height by forcing paper or transparencies under the stack height limiter Loadonly one size and type of paper at a time Loading paper and specialty media 70 5 Adjustthe width guide to lightly touch the edge of the stack Make sure the paper or specialty media fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder lies flat and is not bent or wrinkled 6 From the printer control panel set the Paper Size and Paper Type for the multipurpose feeder MP Feeder Size and MP Feeder Type based on the paper or specialty media loaded Linking and unlinking trays Linking trays Tray linking is useful for large print jobs or multiple copies When one linked tray is empty paper feeds from the next linked tray When the Paper Size and Paper Type settings are the same for any trays the trays are automatically linked The printer automatically senses the Paper Size setting according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the standard 550 sheet tray and the multipurpose feeder The printer can sense A4 A5 JIS B5 Letter Legal Executive and Universal paper sizes The multipurpose feeder and trays using other paper sizes can be linked manually using the Paper Size menu a
38. Low Replace Missing OK Hole Punch Box Shows the status of the hole punch box Near Full Replace Missing OK Understanding printer menus 133 Paper menu Default Source menu Menu item Description Default Source Sets a default paper source for all print jobs Tray x Notes MP Feeder Tray 1 standard tray is the factory default setting From the Paper menu Configure MP feeder must be set to Cassette for MP feeder to appear as a menu setting Manual Paper Manual Envelope e fthe same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and Paper Type settings match then the trays are automatically linked When one tray is empty the print job continues using the linked tray Paper Size Type menu Menu item Description Tray x Size Specifies the paper size loaded in each tray Letter Notes Legal Executive Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory Oficio M xico default setting Folio Fortrays with automatic size sensing only the size detected by the am hardware appears atemen Uni fthesame size and type of paper arein two trays and the Paper Size and Aib PaperTypesettings match then the trays are automatically linked When A4 one tray is empty the print job uses the linked tray A5 JIS B5 Note Only installed trays are listed in this menu Understanding printer menus 134 Menu item Description Tray x Type Speci
39. PROPERTY FOR LOSS OF PRIVACY ARISING OUT ORIN ANY WAY RELATED TO THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM OR OTHERWISE IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PROVISION OF THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT REGARDLESS OF THE NATURE OF THE CLAIM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY AND EVEN IF LEXMARK OR ITS SUPPLIERS AFFILIATES OR REMARKETERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY YOU BASED ON ATHIRD PARTY CLAIM EXCEPTTO THE EXTENT THIS EXCLUSION OF DAMAGES IS DETERMINED LEGALLY INVALID THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDIES FAIL OF THEIR ESSENTIAL PURPOSE Notices 321 10 U S A STATE LAWS This Software Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights You may also have other rights that vary from state to state Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or the exclusion of limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations may not apply to you LICENSE GRANT Lexmark grants you the following rights provided you comply with all terms and conditions of this License Agreement a Use You may Useone 1 copy of the Software Program The term Use means storing loading installing executing or displaying the Software Program If Lexmark has licensed the Software Program to you for concurrent use you must limit the number of authorized users to the number
40. Replace the print cartridge ofthe color with the repeating defect ifthe print defects occur in the following instances in every 37 7 mm 1 48 in of the page in every 41 6 mm 1 64 in of the page in every 42 7 mm 1 68 in of the page in every 94 3 mm 3 71 in of the page REPLACE THE FUSER Replace the fuser if print defects occur in the following instances in every 95 0 mm 3 74 in of the page e in every 146 7 mm 5 78 in of the page Skewed print These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES Move the length and width guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded Make sure the guides are not too far from the paper stack Make sure the guides are not pressing too lightly against the paper stack Troubleshooting 296 CHECK THE PAPER Make sure you are using paper that meets the printer specifications Solid color or black pages appear on prints MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGES ARE INSTALLED CORRECTLY ARE NOT DEFECTIVE AND NOT LOW ON TONER Remove the print cartridges Warning Potential Damage Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs Reinsert the print cartridges Note If the quality does not improve replace the print cartridges e ifthe problem continues the printer may need to be serviced For more information contact customer support Black or white
41. Reserve allows the printer to store print jobs for printing at a later time The print jobs are held until deleted from the Help Jobs menu Repeat Repeat prints and stores print jobs in the printer memory for reprinting Printing confidential and other held jobs Note Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing Repeat and Reserve jobs are held in the printer until you choose to delete them For Windows Users 1 With a document open click File gt Print and then click Properties Preferences Options or Setup 2 Click Other Options gt Print and Hold 3 Select the print job type Confidential Repeat Reserve or Verify and then assign a user name For a confidential print job also enter a four digit PIN 4 Click OK or Print Go to the printer to release the print job Printing 82 From the home screen For confidential print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt your user name gt Confidential Jobs gt your PIN gt your print job name gt number of copies gt Print For other print jobs navigate to Held jobs your user name your print job name number of copies Print For Macintosh users 1 With a document open choose File Print If necessary click the disclosure triangle to see more options 2 From the print options or Copies amp Pages pop up menu choose Job Routing 3 Select your print job type Confidential Repeat Reserve or Veri
42. Touch Copy from gt select the size of the original document gt 5 Touch Copy to gt select the size of the copy gt Note The printer will scale the size automatically 6 Touch Copy It Making copies using paper from a selected tray 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt size of the original document gt Copy to Copying 92 4 Touch Manual Feeder or select the tray that contains the paper type you want to use Note If you choose Manual Feeder then you will also need to select the paper size and type 5 Touch Copy It Copying different paper sizes Use the ADF to copy original documents with different paper sizes Depending on the paper sizes loaded and the Copy to and Copy from settings each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes Example 1 or scaled to fit a single paper size Example 2 Example 1 Copying on mixed paper sizes 1 Loadan original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media sch as
43. Turn the printer off 2 Hold down BA and EI while turning the printer on 3 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears 4 Touch Print Quality Pages Menu gt Print Quality Pages 5 Touch Exit Config Menu to return to the home screen Printing in black and white From the home screen navigate to Settings Print Settings Quality Menu Print Mode Black Only Submit Adjusting toner darkness 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings Print Settings Quality Menu Toner Darkness 3 Adjust the toner darkness setting 4 Click Submit Supported finishing features The printer supports the following finishing features Stacker StapleSmart finisher Two Three or Four hole punch e 5 Bin mailbox Printing 86 1 Standard bin 2 Finisher bin Standard bin The paper capacity is 500 sheets Finishing options are not supported in this bin Envelopes are routed here Finisher bin The paper capacity is 500 sheets Envelopes A5 A6 and Statement paper are not
44. Web site at www lexmark com Menu item Description Print All Guides Prints all the guides Copy Guide Provides information about making copies and changing settings E mail Guide Provides information about sending e mails using addresses shortcut numbers or the address book and about changing settings Fax Guide Provides information about sending faxes using fax numbers shortcut numbers or the address book and about changing settings FTP Guide Provides information about scanning documents directly to an FTP server using an FTP address shortcut numbers or the address book and about changing settings Print Defects Guide Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints Information Guide Provides help in locating additional information Supplies Guide Provides part numbers for ordering supplies J Understanding printer menus 217 Securing the printer hard disk and other installed memory Statement of Volatility Your printer contains various types of memory that are capable of storing device and network settings information from embedded solutions and user data The types of memory along with the types of data stored by each are described below Volatile memory Your device utilizes standard Random Access Memory RAM to temporarily buffer user data during simple print and copy jobs Non volatile memory Your device may utilize two forms of non volatile memory EEPR
45. Wiping 5 f you have enabled Manual mode and wish to set up a schedule for disk wiping click Scheduled Disk Wiping Securing the printer hard disk and other installed memory 219 Notes Scheduled Disk Wiping will not be displayed until after Manual mode has been selected and submitted f you do not wish to schedule disk wiping you can skip steps 5 and 6 6 Use the Time and Day s options to designate when disk wiping should occur and then click Add Repeat as needed to schedule additional times for disk wiping When finished use the browser Back button to return to the Disk Wiping setup screen Note Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which time the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks 7 From the Disk Wiping settings screen select one of the following for each method of disk wiping Automatic Manual and Scheduled Single Pass This lets you overwrite the printer hard disk in a single pass with a repeating bit pattern Multi pass This lets you overwrite the printer hard disk with random bit patterns several times followed by a verification pass A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220 22 M standard for securely erasing data from a hard disk Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method 8 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 Turn the printer off 2 Hold downEZ and EI while turning the printer on It takes approximately
46. a minute to boot into the Configuration menu Once the printer is fully powered up thetouch screen should display a list of functions instead of standard home screen icons such as Copy or Fax 3 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears 4 Touch Wipe Disk and then touch one of the following e Wipe disk fast This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass Wipe disk secure This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times followed by a verification pass A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220 22 M standard for securely erasing data from a hard disk Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method 5 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task Note Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks 6 Touch Back and then Exit Config Menu The printer will power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Securing the printer hard disk and other installed memory 220 Configuring printer hard disk encryption Note Not all printers have a hard disk installed Enabling hard disk encryption helps prevent the loss of sensitive data in the event your printer or its hard disk is stolen 1 Turn the printe
47. amp Fax 2 Click and then click the IP tab 3 Typethe IP address of your printer in the Address field and then click Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier 1 From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Utilities 2 Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center 3 From the Printer List click Add and then click IP Printer 4 Type in the IP address of your printer in the Address field and then click Add For AppleTalk printing Note Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later 1 From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences Print amp Fax 2 Click and then navigate to AppleTalk gt select the printer from the list gt Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier 1 From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Utilities Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center From the Printer List click Add Click Default Browser tab More Printers From the first pop up menu select AppleTalk au RUN From the second pop up menu select Local AppleTalk Zone Select the printer from the list and then click Add N Note If the printer does not show up in the list then you may need to add it using the IP address For more information contact your system support person Additional printer setup 48 Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port When a new Lexmark Internal Solutions Port ISP is installed in the printer the pr
48. and other types of held jobs are not affected Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the printer hard disk or memory Format Flash Yes No Formats the flash memory Warning Potential Damage Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is being formatted Notes Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory No cancels the format request Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory option card in the printer Aflash memory option card must be installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to be available The flash memory option card must not be read write or write protected Delete Downloads on Disk Delete Now Do Not Delete Removes downloads from the printer hard disk including all held jobs buffered jobs and parked jobs Notes Delete Now configures the printer control panel to return to the originating screen after the deletion process is completed DoNot Delete sets the printer control panel to return to the main Utilities menu Activate Hex Trace Assists in isolating the source of a print job problem Notes When activated all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation and control codes are not executed To exit or deactivate Hex Trace turn the printer off or reset the printer Coverage Estimator Off On Provides an estimate of the perc
49. applications 53 Configuring Scan to Network Scan to Network lets users of a printer scan their documents to network destinations specified by the network administrator After the destinations shared network folders have been established on the network the setup process for the application involves installing and configuring the application on the appropriate printer s using the Embedded Web Server Configuring a destination using the Embedded Web Server 1 From the Embedded Web Server click Settings gt Solutions gt Embedded Solutions gt Scan to Network gt Configure 2 Click Add Note You can also edit or delete existing destinations 3 Type a name for the destination 4 Select Network Folder or FTP Address and then configure the selected destination 5 Under Authentication Options select whether to require user authentication for this destination or not The credentials are used to access the network destination 6 In the sections that follow adjust the settings as necessary Select check boxes to allow users to modify settings Useradio buttons and drop down menus to specify the default settings 7 Click OK 8 Repeat to add edit or delete destinations 9 Click Apply Scanning documents at the printer 1 Load the document into the scanner Note Documents may be loaded into the scanner in multiple ways For information on the different methods of loading documents into the scanner see the User s Guide tha
50. arrow Scrolls to the left Home Returns to the home screen fa Right increase Lets you select a higher value Left decrease Lets you select a lower value Exit Lets you exit from the current screen Tips Opens a context sensitive Help dialog on the touch screen Other touch screen buttons Button Function Accept Saves a setting v Cancel Cancels an action or a selection Exits a screen and lets you return to the previous screen without saving x changes Learning about the printer 17 Reset Button Function Resets values on the screen Unselected radio button O Indicates that an item is not selected Selected radio button Indicates a selection Search Lets you search current held jobs Warning Indicates a warning or error condition Features Menu trail line Menus gt Settings gt Copy Settings gt Number of Copies Feature Description A Menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen This feature shows the path taken to arrive at the current menu Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu or menu item The Number of Copies is not underlined since this is the current screen If you touch an underlined word on the Number of Copies screen before the Number of Copies is set and saved then the selection is not saved and it does not become the default setting Attendance message alert If an
51. be set manually for all trays that do not contain plain paper From the home screen navigate to gt Paper Menu gt Paper Size Type gt select a tray gt select the paper size or type gt Submit Configuring Universal paper settings The Universal Paper Size is a user defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer menus Set the Paper Size for the specified tray to Universal when the size you want is not available from the Paper Size menu Then specify all of the following Universal size settings for your paper Units of Measure Portrait Width Portrait Height Notes The largest supported Universal size is 216 x 1219 mm 8 5 x 48 in Thesmallest supported Universal size is 76 x 127 mm 3 x5 in and loaded in the multipurpose feeder only 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Paper Menu gt Universal Setup gt Units of Measure gt select a unit of measure 2 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height gt select the width or height gt Submit Loading paper and specialty media 62 Loading the standard or optional 550 sheet tray The printer has one standard 550 sheet tray Tray 1 and may have one or more optional 550 sheet trays All 550 sheet trays support the same paper sizes and types CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each paper drawer or tray separately Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed 1 Pull the t
52. can be especially useful in sending information to fax lines that are not readily available during certain hours or when transmission times are cheaper Note If the printer is turned off when the delayed fax is scheduled to be sent the fax is sent the next time the printer is turned on Advanced Imaging This lets you adjust the Background Removal Contrast Color Balance Negative Image Mirror Image Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail Sharpness and Temperature settings before you fax the document Custom Job Job Build This lets you combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job e Transmission Log This lets you print the transmission log or transmission error log e Edge Erase This lets you eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan ADF Skew Fix This lets you correct slight skew in the scanned image Holding and forwarding faxes Holding faxes This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released Held faxes can be released manually or at a scheduled day or time 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP sect
53. capacity feeder The high capacity feeder can hold up to 2 000 sheets of A4 letter or legal size paper 80 g m or 20 Ib CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each paper drawer or tray separately Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed 1 Pull the tray out 2 Adjust the width guide as necessary 3 Flexthe sheets back and forth to loosen them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface Loading paper and specialty media 66 4 Load paper into the tray with the print side faceup Note Make sure the paper is below the maximum fill line located on the edge of the paper tray Overloading the tray can cause paper jams Notes Place pre punched paper with the holes toward the front of the tray e Place letterheads faceup with the header on the left side of the tray Placeletterheads facedown with the header on the right side of the tray for duplex printing 5 Insert the tray Loading paper and specialty media 67 Loading the multipurpose feeder The multipurpose feeder can hold several sizes and types of print media such as transparencies labels card stock and envelopes It can be used for single page or manual printing or as an additional tray The multipurpose feeder can hold approximately 100 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib paper 10 envelopes e 75 transparencies The multipurpose feeder accepts paper or specialty media
54. consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in order to calculate energy usage The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode s energy usage Industry Canada compliance statement This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Standard ICES 003 Avis de conformit aux normes de l industrie du Canada Cet appareil num rique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux quipements pouvant causer des interf rences NMB 003 European Community EC directives conformity This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 1999 5 EC on the approximation and harmonization ofthe laws ofthe Member States relating to electromagnetic Notices 511 compatibility and safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hung ria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety
55. continue to continue printing afterthe correct paper size and type are loaded in the tray and are correctly specified in the printer control panel Paper menu Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Change src to custom type namel load orientation Incomplete printing of texts and images may be caused by incorrect paper size or type loaded in the paper tray Try one or more of the following Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type Touch Use current src to ignore the message and print from the selected tray TouchPaper changed continue to continue printing afterthe correct paper size and type are loaded in the tray and are correctly specified in the printer control panel Paper menu Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Change src to custom string Incomplete printing of texts and images may be caused by incorrect paper size or type loaded in the paper tray Try one or more of the following Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type Touch Use current src to ignore the message and print from the selected tray TouchPaper changed continue to continue printing afterthe correct paper size and type are loaded in the tray and are correctly specified in the printer control panel Paper menu Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Change src to custom string load orientation Incomplete printing of texts and images may be caused by incorrect paper size or ty
56. default setting Heavy Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Heavy as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Rough Cotton Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Rough or Cotton as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Notes Duplex sets the printer default to 2 sided printing for every print job unless 1 sided printing is selected from Print Properties e f Duplex is selected then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit including 1 sided print jobs Understanding printer menus 142 Menu item Description Properties Custom x Loading Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that Off specify Custom x as the paper type Duplex Notes Offis the factory default setting Custom x Loading is available only if the custom paper type is supported Notes Duplex sets the printer default to 2 sided printing for every print job unless 1 sided printing is selected from Print uw If Duplex is selected then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit including 1 sided print jobs M Custom Types menu Menu item Description Custom Type x Associates a paper or specialty media type with a factory default Custom Paper Type x name or a user defined Custom Name created from the Car
57. default setting XON XOFF DTR DTR DSRis a hardware handshaking setting XONXOFF DTRDSR XON XOFF is a software handshaking setting XON XOFF DTR and XON XOFF DTR DSR are combined hardware and software handshaking settings Robust XON Determines whether the printer communicates availability to the computer off Notes On Offis the factory default setting This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to XON XOFF Baud Specifies the rate at which data can be received through the serial port 9600 Notes 19200 38400 9600 is the factory default setting 57600 138200 172800 230400 and 345600 baud rates are only displayed in the 115200 Standard Serial menu These settings do not appearin the Serial Option 1 Serial Option 2 or Serial Option 3 menus 138200 172800 230400 345600 1200 2400 4800 Data Bits Specifies the number of data bits sent in each transmission frame 8 Note 8 is the factory default setting 7 Parity Sets the parity for serial input and output data frames None Note None is the factory default setting Ignore Even Odd Understanding printer menus 158 Menu item Description Honor DSR Determines whether the printer uses the DSR Signal Off Notes On e Off is the factory default setting e DSRisa handshaking signal used by most serial cables The serial port uses DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by electrical noise in the serial cable The
58. default setting 356 mmis the international factory default setting The height can be increased in 0 01 inch or in 1 mm increments Feed Direction Specifies the feed direction Short Edge Notes Long Edge Short Edge is the factory default setting Long Edge appears only if the longest edge is shorter than the maximum width supported in the tray Bin Setup menu Menu Item Description Output Bin Specifies the default output bin Standard Bin Note Standard Bin is the factory default setting Bin x Configure Bins Specifies configuration options for output bins Mailbox Notes Link Mail Overflow e Mailbox is the factory default setting This setting treats each bin as a separate mailbox Link Optional T Link configures all available bins as one large output ype Assignment bin Link Optional links together all available output bins except the standard bin and only appears when at least two optional bins are installed Type Assignment assigns each paper type to an output bin or linked bin set Binsassignedthe same name are automatically linked unless Link Optional is selected Overflow Bin Specifies an alternate output bin when a designated bin Standard Bin is full Bin x Note Standard Bin is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 145 Menu Item Description Assign Type Bin Selects an output bin for each supported paper type Plain Paper Bin Available selecti
59. deselect Fax and any other function you plan to set up later and then touch Continue The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled and not fully set up A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm Do not set up this product ormakeany electrical or cabling connections suchas the fax feature power cord or telephone during a lightning storm Warning Potential Damage Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or receiving a fax Faxing 108 Initial fax setup Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page oron the first page ofthe transmission station name identification ofthe business other entity or individual sending the message and station number telephone number of the sending fax machine business other entity or individual To enter your fax setup information use the printer control panel or use your browser to access the Embedded Web Server and then enter the Settings menu Note If you do not have a TCP IP environment then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax setup information Using the printer control panel for fax setup When the printer is turned on for the first time or if the printer has been off for an extended time a series of start up screens appear If the printer has fax capabilities then the follow
60. download emulator on the firmware card To fix this download the correct download emulator version from the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com Troubleshooting 269 Solving basic printer problems If there are basic printer problems or the printer is unresponsive make sure The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors uninterrupted power supplies or extension cords Other electronic equipment plugged into the outlet is working The printer is turned on Check the printer power switch The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer print server option or other network device All options are properly installed The printer driver settings are correct Once you have checked each of these possibilities turn the printer off wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on This often fixes the problem Solving printing problems Multiple language PDF files do not print The PDF files may contain unavailable fonts 1 Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat 2 Click the printer icon gt Advanced gt Print as image gt OK gt OK Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds The printer self test failed Turn the printer off wait about 10 seconds and then turn the printer on
61. edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrai and left edge for landscape Understanding printer menus 200 Menu item Description JPEG Quality Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality Best for content Notes 5 90 Best for content is the factory default setting 5 reduces the file size but the quality of the image is lessened 90 provides the best image quality but the file size is very large This menu item applies to all scan functions Text Default Sets the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image 5 90 Note 75 is the factory default setting Text Photo Default 5 90 Sets the quality of a text photo image in relation to file size and the quality Note 75 is the factory default setting Photo Default 5 90 Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality Note 50 is the factory default setting Use Multi Page TIFF On Off Provides a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to FTP job either one TIFF fileis created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page Notes Onisthe factory default setting This menu item applies to all scan functions Scan Bit Depth Enables the Text Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images when 8 bit Col
62. factory default setting Off Understanding printer menus 150 Menu item p AJ Enable AutoIP Specifies the Zero Configuration Networking setting Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No Enable FTP TFTP Enables the built in FTP server which allows you to send files to the printer using File Yes Transfer Protocol No Note Yes is the factory default setting Enable HTTP Server Enables the built in web server Embedded Web Server When enabled the printer Yes can be monitored and managed remotely using a web browser No Note Yes is the factory default setting WINS Server Address Lets you view or change the current WINS server address Enable DDNS Lets you view or change the current DDNS setting Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No Enable mDNS Lets you view or change the current mDNS setting Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No DNS Server Address Lets you view or change the current DNS server address Enable HTTPS Lets you view or change the current HTTPS setting Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No V IPv6 menu This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network x gt Standard Network Setup or Network x Setup gt IPv6 Note This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print servers Menu item Enable IPv6 Description Enables IPv6 in the printer Note On is the facto
63. feeder 66 letterhead in multipurpose feeder 79 multipurpose feeder 68 loading card stock in multipurpose feeder 68 loading envelopes in multipurpose feeder 68 loading the multipurpose feeder 68 loading the standard tray 63 loading transparencies in multipurpose feeder 68 lock security 13 making copies using paper from selected tray 92 memory types installed on printer 218 memory card installing 23 troubleshooting 287 Memory full cannot print faxes 260 menu settings page printing 40 menus Active NIC 147 AppleTalk 152 Bin Setup 145 Confidential Print 162 Configure MP 137 Copy Settings 172 Custom Bin Names 144 Custom Names 143 Custom Scan Sizes 144 Custom Types 143 Default Source 134 diagram of 131 Disk Wiping 162 Edit Security Setups 160 E mail Settings 189 Fax Mode Analog Fax Setup 179 Fax Mode Fax Server Setup 187 Finishing 206 Index 329 Flash Drive 199 FTP Settings 194 General Settings 165 Help 217 HTML 215 Image 216 IPv6 151 Miscellaneous 161 Network x 147 Network Card 149 Network Reports 149 Paper Loading 141 Paper Size Type 134 Paper Texture 138 Paper Weight 140 Parallel x 155 PCL Emul 212 PDF 211 PostScript 212 Quality 208 Reports 146 Security Audit Log 163 Serial x 157 Set Date and Time 164 Setup 204 SMTP Setup menu 159 Standard Network 147 Standard USB 153 Substitute Size 138 Supplies 132 TCP IP 150 Utilities 211 Wireless 152 XPS 216 menus diagram 131 Mis
64. forwarded Note The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the Forward to menu Click Submit Faxing 121 Scanning to an FTP address ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings MV The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol FTP server Only one FTP address may be sent to the server at a time Once an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person the name of the destination becomes available as a shortcut number An FTP destination could also be another printer for example a color document can be scanned and then sent to a color printer Scanning to an FTP address Scanning to an FTP address using the touch screen 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to FTP gt FTP gt type the FTP address gt Send It Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into
65. g m grain short is recommended Paper and specialty media guidelines 73 Fiber content Most high quality xerographic paper is made from 10096 chemically treated pulped wood This content provides the paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality Paper containing fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling Selecting paper Using appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble free printing To help avoid jams and poor print quality Always use new undamaged paper Before loading paper know the recommended print side of the paper This information is usually indicated on the paper package Donot use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand Donot mix paper sizes types or weights in the same source mixing results in jams Donot use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead Use grain long for 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib weight paper Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces Use papers printed with heat resistant inks designed foruse in xerographic copiers The ink must be able to withstand temperatures up to 190 C 374 F without melting or releasing hazardous emissions
66. is scanned edge to edge Note Off is the factory default setting On Sharpness Adjusts the amount of sharpness of a copy 1 5 Note 3 is the factory default setting Temperature Enables the user to specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer Ato4 output than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default Sample Copy Creates a sample copy of the original document Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Understanding printer menus 178 Fax Settings menu Fax Mode Analog Fax Setup menu Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job by way of a telephone line General Fax Settings Menu item Description Fax Name or Station Name Specifies the name of the fax in the printer Fax Number or Station Specifies a number associated with the fax Number Station ID Specifies how the fax is identified Fax Name or Station Name Fax Number or Station Number Enable Manual Fax Sets the printer to fax manually only which requires a line splitter and a telephone Off handset On Notes e Usearegulartelephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax number Touch 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function Memory Use Defines the allocation of non volatile memory between sending and receiving fax Equal jobs Mostly sent Notes All send Equalis the factory default setting Equal splits the memory for sending and
67. is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding 2 Remove paper from the standard exit bin 3 Dampen a clean lint free cloth with water Warning Potential Damage Do not use household cleaners or detergents as they may damage the finish of the printer 4 Wipe only the outside of the printer making sure to include the standard exit bin Warning Potential Damage Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer 5 Make sure the paper support and standard exit bin are dry before beginning a new print job Maintaining the printer 222 Cleaning the scanner glass Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems such as streaks on copied or scanned images 1 Slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth or paper towel with water 2 Open the scanner cover White underside of the ADF cover I om White underside of the scanner cover Scanner glass ADF glass A W in l 3 Wipe the areas shown and let them dry Maintaining the printer 223 4 Open the bottom ADF door 5 Wipe the ADF scanner glass under the ADF door 6 Close the bottom ADF door 7 Close the scanner cover Cleaning the ADF parts Clean the ADF parts periodically to maintain opt
68. low level energy saving mode 0 75 W Off The product is plugged into a wall outlet but the power switch is turned off 0 W J The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time averaged measurements Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average Values are subject to change See www lexmark com for current values Sleep Mode This product is designed with an energy saving mode called Sleep Mode The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product is not used for a specified period of time called the Sleep Mode Timeout Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product in minutes 30 By using the configuration menus the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 240 minutes Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption but may increase the response time of the product Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response but uses more energy Off mode If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power then to completely stop product power consumption disconnect the power supply cord from the wall outlet Total energy usage It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage Since power consumption claims are provided in power units of Watts the power
69. menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Manage Shortcuts gt Fax Shortcut Setup Note A password may be required If you do not have an ID and password get one from your system support person 3 Typeaunique name for the shortcut and then enter the fax number To create a multiple number shortcut enter the fax numbers for the group Note Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon 4 Assign a shortcut number If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number 5 Click Add Creating a fax destination shortcut using the touch screen 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax enter the fax number To create a group of fax numbers touch Next number and then enter the next fax number 4 Navigate to gt enter a name for the shortcut gt Done gt OK gt Fax It Faxing 115 Using shortcuts and the address book Using fax shortcuts Fax shortcuts are just like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or fax machine You can as
70. mukainen Fran ais Par la pr sente Lexmark International Inc d clare que l appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999 5 CE Magyar Alul rott Lexmark International Inc nyilatkozom hogy a term k megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet k vetelm nyeknek s az 1999 5 EC ir nyelv egy b el r sainak slenska H r me l sir Lexmark International Inc yfir v a essi vara er samr mi vi grunnkr fur og a rar kr fur sem ger ar eru tilskipun 1999 5 EC Italiano Con la presente Lexmark International Inc dichiara che questo questo prodotto conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999 5 CE Latviski Ar o Lexmark International Inc deklar ka is izstr d jums atbilst Direkt vas 1999 5 EK b tiskaj m pras b m un citiem ar to saist tajiem noteikumiem Lietuvi iuo Lexmark International Inc deklaruoja kad is produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999 5 EB direktyvos nuostatas Malti Bil pre enti Lexmark International Inc jiddikjara li dan il prodott huwa konformi mal ti ijiet essenzjali u ma dispo izzjonijiet o rajn relevanti li jinsabu fid Direttiva 1999 5 KE Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International Inc dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essenti le eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999 5 EG Norsk
71. not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings Fax Settings Analog Fax Setup Block No Name Fax Notes This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or no fax station name n the Banned Fax List field enter the phone numbers or fax station names of specific fax callers you want to block Canceling an outgoing fax Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning When using the ADF touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears When using the scanner glass touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears or while Scan the Next Page Finish the Job appears Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory 1 On the home screen touch Cancel Jobs The Cancel Jobs screen appears 2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel Only three jobs appear on the screen touch the down arrow until the job you want appears and then touch the job you want to cancel 3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears the selected jobs are deleted and then the home screen appears Understanding fax options Content This option tells the printer the original document type and source Choose content type from Text Text Photo Pho
72. open choose File gt Print If necessary click the disclosure triangle to see more options 2 From the Print dialog and pop up menus adjust the settings as needed Note To print on a specific paper type adjust the paper type setting to match the loaded paper or select the appropriate tray or feeder 3 Click Print Printing on specialty media Tips on using letterhead Useletterhead designed specifically for laser printers Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities Before loading letterhead flex the sheets to prevent them from sticking together Printing 79 Observe proper page orientation Source Standard 550 sheet tray Optional 550 sheet tray Optional 2000 sheet high capacity feeder Print side Preprinted letterhead design is placed faceup Paper orientation The top edge of the sheet with the logo is placed at the left side of the tray Duplex two sided printing from trays Preprinted letterhead design is placed facedown The top edge of the sheet with the logo is placed at the right side of the tray Multipurpose feeder simplex printing Preprinted letterhead design is placed facedown The top edge of the sheet with the logo should enter the multipurpose feeder first Multipurpose feeder duplex printing Preprinted letterhead design is placed faceup The top edge of the sheet with the logo should ente
73. or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location You are responsible for loss of or damage to a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part the item replaced becomes the property of the Remarketer or Lexmark The replacement may be a new or repaired item The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced altered in need of a repair not included in warranty service damaged beyond repair or if the product is not free of all legal obligations restrictions liens and encumbrances Before you present this product for warranty service remove all print cartridges programs data and removable storage media unless directed otherwise by Lexmark Forfurther explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact Lexmark on the World Wide Web at http support lexmark com Remotetechnical supportis providedforthis productthroughoutits warranty period For products nolonger covered by a Lexmark warranty technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee Extent of limited warranty Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints produced by any product Warranty s
74. paper jam occurs in the ADF Notes f Joblevelis selected the entire job must be rescanned if any pages jam f Page level is selected rescan from the jammed page forward Web Page Refresh Rate 30 300 Specifies the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server refreshes Note 120 seconds is the factory default setting Contact Name Specifies a contact name for the printer Note The contact name will be stored on the Embedded Web Server Location Specifies the location of the printer Note The location will be stored on the Embedded Web Server Alarms Sets an alarm to sound when the printer requires operator Alarm Control intervention Cartridge Alarm Available selections for each alarm type are Staple Alarm Off Single Continuous Notes Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control Single sounds three quick beeps Offis the factory default setting for Cartridge Alarm Off means no alarm will sound Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds Timeouts Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity before the system Standby Mode enters a lower power state 1 240 Note 15 minutes is the factory default setting Disabled Timeouts Sets the amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed Sleep Mode before it goes into a reduced power state 1 240 min Notes Disabled 30 minutes is the factory default setting Disabled appears only when Energy Conserve is set to Off L
75. power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the additional bins 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on 58 Too many disks installed 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the excess disks 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on 58 Too many flash options installed 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the excess flash memory 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet 5 Turn the printer back on 58 Too many trays attached 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the additional trays 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet 5 Turn the printer back on 58 Input config error 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Check if all tray configurations are correct Remove unnecessary trays if needed Troubleshooting 266 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on 59 Incompatible output bin x Try one or more of the following Remove the specified output bin Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified output bin 61 Remove defective disk Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message and continue pr
76. print quality does not improve then replace the cartridge of the color that is not printing If the problem continues then the printer may need to be serviced For more information contact customer support Characters have jagged or uneven edges ABC DEF If you are using downloaded fonts verify that the fonts are supported by the printer the host computer and the software program Troubleshooting 289 Colors are not aligned properly Color has shifted outside of the appropriate area or has been superimposed over another color area Try one or more of the following PERFORM CorLoR ADJUST From the printer control panel Quality menu perform Color Adjust REINSTALL THE PRINT CARTRIDGES Remove and reinstall all four print cartridges ADJUST THE COLOR ALIGNMENT 1 Turn the printer off 2 Load letter or A4 size paper in the tray 3 Hold down EZ and EI while turning the printer on 4 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears ui Touch Color Alignment gt Print Alignment Page The color alignment pages print Touch Color Alignment On the printed alignment pages find the straightest of the 20 lines beside the letter A on Q From the printer control panel touch the arrows to select that number 9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 to align sets B through L 10 Touch Back gt Exit Config Menu Note If nec
77. printer menus 167 Menu item Displayed Information continued Paper Jam Load Paper Service Errors Home screen customization Change Language Copy Copy shortcuts Fax Fax Shortcuts E mail E mail Shortcuts FTP FTP Shortcuts Search Held Jobs Held Jobs USB Drive Profiles Bookmarks Jobs by user Description Lets you customize the displayed information for Paper Jam Load Paper and Service Errors Choose from the following options Display No Yes Message to Display Default Alternate Default text entry Alternate text entry Notes No is the factory default setting for Display Defaultis the factory default setting for Message to Display Lets you change the buttons that appear on the home screen Available selections for each button are Do not display Display Date Format MM DD YYYY DD MM YYYY YYYY MM DD Formats the printer date Time Format 12 hour A M P M 24 hour clock Formats the printer time Screen Brightness 20 100 Specifies the brightness of the printer control panel screen Understanding printer menus 168 Menu item Description One Page Copy Sets the copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Output Lighting Sets the amount of light from the standard bin Normal Standby Mode Notes Off Dim f Eco Mode is set to Energy or Energy Paper the factory default setting is Dim
78. product uses a laser Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure This product uses a printing process that heats the print media and the heat may cause the media to release emissions You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced Do not recharge disassemble or incinerate a lithium battery Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions and local regulations A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Before moving the printer follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage Turn the printer off using the power switch and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it Lift the printer off the optional drawer and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawe
79. serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes On is the factory default setting When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off PS SmartSwitch Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received On through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes Onisthe factory default setting When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off NPA Mode Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional Auto communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol On Notes Off i d 1 Auto isthe factory default setting Auto sets the printer to examine data determine the format and then processes it appropriately When set to On the printer performs NPA processing If the data is not in NPA format it is rejected as bad data When set to Off the printer does not perform NPA processing e Changingthissettingfromthe printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Serial Buffer Sets the size of th
80. setting Off Background Removal Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy 4to4 Note 0 is the factory default setting Auto Center Off On Lets you automatically center the content on the page Note Off is the factory default setting Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Enables an equal balance of colors in the output Understanding printer menus 177 Color Dropout Color Dropout Menu item Description Specifies which color to drop during copies and how much to increase or decrease the dropout None Notes Red PN None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout Blue 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Contrast Specifies the contrast used for the copy job Best for content Note Best for content is the factory default setting 0 5 Mirror Image Creates a mirror image of the original document Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Negative Image Creates a negative image of the original document Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Shadow Detail Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy 4to4 Note 0 is the factory default setting ADF Skew Fix Lets you fix slight skew on the scanned image Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Scan edge to edge Off Specifies if the original document
81. small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt size of the original document gt Copy to gt Manual Feeder Copying 91 4 Place the letterhead faceup top edge first in the multipurpose feeder 5 Select the size of the letterhead 6 Navigate to Continue gt Letterhead gt Continue gt Copy It Customizing copy settings Copying in black and white 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Allow color copies gt Off gt gt Submit Copying to a different size 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy 4
82. specified in the printer control panel Paper menu Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Change src to Isizel type Incomplete printing of texts and images may be caused by incorrect paper size or type loaded in the paper tray Try one or more of the following Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type Touch Use current src to ignore the message and print from the selected tray TouchPaper changed continue to continue printing afterthe correct paper size and type are loaded in the tray and are correctly specified in the printer control panel Paper menu Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Change src to size type load orientation Incomplete printing of texts and images may be caused by incorrect paper size or type loaded in the paper tray Try one or more of the following Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type Touch Use current src to ignore the message and print from the selected tray TouchPaper changed continue to continue printing afterthe correct paper size and type are loaded in the tray and are correctly specified in the printer control panel Paper menu Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Troubleshooting 254 Check src orientation or guides Try one or more of the following Move the paper guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the t
83. specified in your agreement with Lexmark You may not separate the components of the Software Program for use on more than one computer You agree that you will not Use the Software Program in whole or in part in any manner that has the effect of overriding modifying eliminating obscuring altering or de emphasizing the visual appearance of any trademark trade name trade dress or intellectual property notice that appears on any computer display screens normally generated by or as a result of the Software Program b Copying You may make one 1 copy of the Software Program solely for purposes of backup archiving or installation provided the copy contains all of the original Software Program s proprietary notices You may not copy the Software Program to any public or distributed network C Reservation of Rights The Software Program including all fonts is copyrighted and owned by Lexmark International Inc and or its suppliers Lexmark reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this License Agreement d Freeware Notwithstanding the terms and conditions of this License Agreement all or any portion of the Software Program that constitutes software provided under public license by third parties Freeware is licensed to you subject to the terms and conditions of the software license agreement accompanying such Freeware whether in the form of a discrete agreement shrink wrap license or electronic license terms at the time of d
84. supported in this bin Finishing features Two hole punch Three or four hole 5 bin Mailbox StapleSmart Finisher punch A4 v v v v A5 X X J X Executive v v J J Printing 87 Two hole punch Three or four hole 5 bin Mailbox StapleSmart Finisher punch Folio J X J J JIS B5 v J JV JV Legal J J J J Letter JV v v J Statement X X J J Universal X X J J Envelopes any size X X J X Oficio J J J J Canceling a print job Canceling a print job from the printer control panel 1 Touch Cancel Jobs on the touch screen or press iJ on the keypad 2 Touch the job you want to cancel and then touch Delete Selected Jobs Canceling a print job from the computer For Windows users 1 Open the printers folder a Click or click Start and then click Run b In the Start Search or Run box type control printers C Press Enter or click OK 2 Double click the printer icon 3 Select the print job you want to cancel 4 From the keyboard press Delete For Macintosh users In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later 1 From the Apple menu choose System Preferences gt Print amp Fax gt Open Print Queue 2 From the printer window select the print job you want to cancel 3 From the icon bar at the top of the window click the Delete icon Printing 88 In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier 1 From the Finder navigate to Go gt Applications Double cl
85. the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950 Products equipped with 2 4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 1999 5 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment Ceo Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries but is restricted to indoor use only Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hung ria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE EL ES FI FR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MT NL NO PL PT RO SE SI SK TR UK esky Spole nost Lexmark International Inc t mto prohla uje e v robek tento v robek je ve shod se z kladn
86. the scanner unit 2 Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open 3 Lower the scanner unit Poor copy quality These are some examples of poor copy quality Blank pages Checkerboard pattern Distorted graphics or pictures Missing characters Faded print Dark print Skewed lines Smudges Streaks Unexpected characters White lines in print Try one or more of the following CLEAR ANY ERROR MESSAGES Check the display and clear any error messages REPLACE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE When the print remains faded replace the toner or print cartridge CLEAN THE SCANNER GLASS The scanner glass may be dirty Clean the scanner glass with a clean lint free cloth dampened with water For more information see Cleaning the scanner glass on page 223 ADJUST THE TONER DARKNESS OF THE COPY Adjust the toner darkness from the Copy menus MAKE SURE THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT IS SATISFACTORY Check the quality of the original document Troubleshooting 274 PLACE THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT PROPERLY Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner MAKE SURE TO USE THE APPROPRIATE CoPv sETTINGS When patterns moir appear in the output On the Copy screen make sure the Content Type and Source settings are appropriate for the document being scanned From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options Advanced Imaging Sharpness
87. the special processing required for bidirectional Auto communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol On Notes Off Auto is the factory default setting Auto sets the printer to examine data determine the format and then process it appropriately e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Understanding printer menus 153 USB Buffer Auto 3KB to maximum size allowed Disabled Menu item Description Sets the size of the USB input buffer Notes Auto is the factory default setting Disabled turns off job buffering Any jobs already buffered on the printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1 KB increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and network buffers Changingthis setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Job Buffering Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing off Notes On Auto e Offis the factory default setting On buffers jobs on the printer h
88. the virtual keyboard type the name or part of the name of the person whose fax number you want to find Note Do not attempt to search for multiple names at the same time 5 Touch Done gt Fax It Customizing fax settings Changing the fax resolution Settings range from Standard fastest speed to Ultra Fine slowest speed best quality 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides Faxing 116 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax enter the fax number Options 4 From the Resolution area touch the arrows to change to the resolution you want 5 Touch Fax It Making a fax lighter or darker 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax enter the fax number Options 4 From the Darkness area touch the arrows to adjust the darkness of the fax 5 Touch Fax It Sendi
89. then gently pull it out Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the center of the fuser unit Doing so will damage the fuser Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Close the side door of the printer 4 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared Clearing jams 242 202 2083 paper jams If paper is visible in the standard exit bin then firmly grasp the paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Paper jam in the fuser 1 Open the side door of the printer A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 2 If paper is visible inside the fuser unit then open the fuser access door 3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the center of the fuser unit Doing so will damage the fuser Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 4 Close the side door Clearing jams 243 Paper jam under the fuser 1 Open the side door of the printer A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 2 If paper is visible under the fuser then firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3
90. this page or use this product you acknowledge your agreement to these License Agreement terms and conditions and that you are doing so with the intent to sign a contract with Lexmark CAPACITY AND AUTHORITY TO CONTRACT You represent that you are of the legal age of majority in the place you sign this License Agreement and if applicable you are duly authorized by your employer or principal to enter into this contract ENTIRE AGREEMENT This License Agreement including any addendum or amendment to this License Agreementthatis included with the Software Program is the entire agreement between you and Lexmark relating tothe Software Program Except as otherwise provided for herein these terms and conditions supersede all prior or contemporaneous oral or written communications proposals and representations with respect to the Software Program or any other subject matter covered by this License Agreement except to the extent such extraneous terms do not conflict with the terms of this License Agreement any other written agreement signed by you and Lexmark relating to your Use ofthe Software Program To the extent any Lexmark policies or programs for support services conflict with the terms of this License Agreement the terms of this License Agreement shall control MICROSOFT CORPORATION NOTICES 1 2 This product may incorporate intellectual property owned by Microsoft Corporation The terms and conditions upon which Microsoft is licensi
91. to use them Do not expose supplies to Direct sunlight Temperatures above 35 C 95 F High humidity above 80 Salty air Corrosive gases Heavy dust Checking the status of supplies A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required Checking the status of supplies from the printer control panel From the home screen touch Status Supplies View Supplies Checking the status of supplies from a network computer Note The computer must be connected to the same network as the printer Maintaining the printer 228 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Device Status The Device Status page appears displaying a summary of supply levels Ordering supplies To order supplies in the U S contact Lexmark at 1 800 539 6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies dealers in your area In other countries or regions visit the Lexmark Web Site at www lexmark com or contact the place where you purchased the printer Notes The toner gauge is an estimate of how much toner is left in your cartridge e All life estimates for printer supplies assume printi
92. touch Cancel and then reenter the information E mailing 102 E mailing a document Sending an e mail using the touch screen 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen touch E mail Recipient 4 Enter the e mail address or press f and then enter the shortcut number To enter additional recipients touch Next Address and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add Note You can also enter an e mail address using the address book For more information see Using the address book on page 116 5 Touch Done Email It Sending an e mail using a shortcut number 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Press enter the shortcut number using the keypad and then touch To enter additional recipients touch Next address and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to
93. 1 Access the AirPort options In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences gt Network gt AirPort In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier From the Finder navigate to Applications Internet Connect AirPort 2 From the Network Name pop up menu select print server yyyyyy where the y s are the last six digits of the MAC address you obtained earlier from the printed network setup page 3 Open a Safari browser 4 From the Bookmarks drop down menu select Show or Show All Bookmarks Under COLLECTIONS select Bonjour or Rendezvous and then double click the printer name Note The application referred to as Rendezvous in Mac OS X version 10 2 is now called Bonjour by Apple Inc 6 From the Embedded Web Server navigate to where the wireless settings information are stored Configure the printer for wireless access Type the name of your network SSID in the appropriate field Select Infrastructure as your Network Mode if you are using a wireless router Select the type of security you want to use to protect your wireless network 1 2 3 4 Enter the security information necessary for the printer to join your wireless network 5 Click Submit 6 Open the AirPort application on your computer In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences gt Network gt AirPort In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier From the Finder navigate to Applications
94. 1 From the home screen navigate to Menus Settings General Settings 2 Touch the left or right arrow next to Run initial setup and then touch Yes gt Submit 3 Turn the printer off and then turn the printer back on 4 From the printer control panel touch your language 5 Touch your country or region and then touch Continue 6 Select your time zone and then touch Continue 7 Touch Fax and E mail to clear the icons and then touch Continue Note You can use these same steps to enable fax and e mail Understanding printer messages Adjusting color Wait for the process to complete An error has occured with the Flash Drive Please remove and re insert the drive Try one or more of the following Remove and reinsert the flash drive Ifthe error message remains the flash memory may be defective and require replacing An error has occurred with the USB drive Please remove and reinsert drive Try one or more of the following Remove and reinsert the flash drive e Ifthe error message remains the flash memory may be defective and require replacement Troubleshooting 252 Change src to custom type namel Incomplete printing of texts and images may be caused by incorrect paper size or type loaded in the paper tray Try one or more of the following Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type Touch Use current src to ignore the message and print from the selected tray TouchPaper changed
95. 1 sided is the factory default setting You can set 2 sided printing from the software program For Windows users click File gt Print and then click Properties Preferences Options or Setup For Macintosh users choose File gt Print and then adjust the settings from the print dialog and pop up menus Duplex Binding Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of Long Edge the page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page e Long Edge is the factory default setting Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape Copies Specifies the default number of copies for each print job 1 999 Note 1 is the factory default setting Blank Pages Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job Do Not Print Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Print Collate Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies Off 1 1 1 2 2 2 On 1 2 1 2 1 2 Notes e Off is the factory default setting On stacks the print job in sequence Separator Sheets None Between Copies Between Jobs Between Pages Specifies whether blank separator sheets are inserted Notes None is the factory default setting Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each co
96. 2 201 paper jam 242 202 203 paper jams 243 230 paper jam 244 231 239 paper jams 245 24x paper jam 245 250 paper jam 246 280 289 paper jam 247 280 299 224 290 292 paper jams 248 400 403 paper jams 248 431 438 paper jams 249 460 461 paper jams 248 Paper Loading menu 141 paper size setting 62 Paper Size Type menu 134 paper sizes supported by printer 76 Paper Texture menu 138 paper type setting 62 paper types duplex support 78 supported by printer 78 where to load 78 Paper Weight menu 140 Parallel x menu 155 PCL Emul menu 212 PDF menu 211 photos copying 91 placing separator sheets between copies 95 port settings configuring 49 PostScript menu 212 print cartridge replacing 231 print cartridges ordering 229 print irregularities 293 print job canceling from computer 88 Index 530 print quality cleaning the ADF parts 224 cleaning the printhead lenses 226 cleaning the scanner glass 223 isolating problems 86 print quality troubleshooting black streaks on a page 297 blank pages 289 characters have jagged edges 289 clipped images 290 colors not aligned properly 290 fine horizontal lines 291 gray background on prints 292 isolating print quality problems 288 light colored line white line or incorrectly colored line appears on prints 293 poor transparency quality 301 print irregularities 293 print is too dark 294 print is too light 295 repeating print defects 296 shadow images appear on prints 291 skewed print
97. 296 solid color or black pages appear on prints 297 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 298 streaked vertical lines 298 toner fog or background shading 299 toner rubs off 300 toner specks 300 uneven print density 301 white streaks on a page 297 print troubleshooting error reading USB drive 270 held jobs do not print 271 incorrect characters print 272 incorrect margins 292 jammed pages are not reprinted 288 job prints from wrong tray 272 job prints on wrong paper 272 jobs do not print 270 Large jobs do not collate 273 multiple language PDF files do not print 270 paper curl 293 paper frequently jams 287 print job takes longer than expected 272 tray linking does not work 272 unexpected page breaks 273 printer configurations 10 finishing features 86 moving 235 236 shipping 236 printer configurations 10 printer control panel 14 adjusting brightness 59 factory defaults restoring 239 printer hard disk disposing of 218 encrypting 221 installing 31 removing 36 troubleshooting 286 printer hard disk encryption 221 printer information where to find 9 printer messages 1565 Emulation error load emulation option 269 31 xx Missing or Defective color cartridge 262 32 xx color cartridge part number unsupported by device 262 34 Incorrect paper size open src 262 35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 262 37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation 263 37 Insufficient memory to coll
98. 313 314 315 tips card stock 81 labels paper 81 on using envelopes 80 on using letterhead 79 on using transparencies 80 tips on using envelopes 80 tips on using letterhead 79 toner cartridges recycling 61 toner darkness adjusting 86 touch screen buttons 16 transparencies copying on 91 loading 80 loading in multipurpose feeder 68 tips on using 80 using 80 Tray x paper size unsupported 262 tray linking assigning a custom paper type name 72 tray unlinking assigning a custom paper type name 72 trays linking 71 unlinking 71 troubleshooting A network destination stopped working or is invalid 283 an application error has occurred 282 application icon is missing 282 cannot open Embedded Web Server 304 checking an unresponsive printer 270 checking an unresponsive scanner 276 contacting customer support 305 FAQ about color printing 301 Forms are not available or are not working 281 indicator light is blinking 252 printer cannot scan to selected destination 283 Scan to Network 282 283 solving basic printer problems 270 troubleshooting copy copier does not respond 273 partial document or photo copies 275 poor copy quality 274 poor scanned image quality 277 scanner unit does not close 274 troubleshooting display display is blank 270 display shows only diamonds 270 troubleshooting fax caller ID is not shown 278 can receive but not send faxes 280 can send but not receive faxes 280 cannot send or re
99. 35 mm i i Sich 14 inches is the US factory default setting for Height 297 millimeters is pea the international factory default setting for Height Portrait i i Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation Landscape a Offis the factory default setting for 2 scans per side 2 scans per side Off On Universal Setup menu These menu items are used to specify the height and width of the Universal paper size The Universal paper size is a user defined paper size setting It is listed with the other paper size settings and includes similar options such as support for duplex printing and printing multiple pages on one sheet Menu item Description Units of Measure Identifies the unit of measure Inches Note Inches is the US factory default setting Millimeters is the Millimeters international factory default setting Portrait Width Sets the portrait width 3 48 inches Notes 76 1219 mm e Ifthe width exceeds the maximum then the printer uses the maximum width allowed 8 5 inches is the US factory default setting 216 mm is the international factory default setting The width can be increased in 0 01 inch or in 1 mm increments Understanding printer menus 144 Menu item Description Portrait Height Sets the portrait height 3 48 inches Notes 76 1219 mm Ifthe height exceeds the maximum then the printer uses the maximum height allowed 14inchesis the US factory
100. 9 88 xx Color cartridge critically low 269 88 xx color cartridge low 268 269 88 xx color cartridge nearly low 268 Index 325 A accessing the system board 20 Active NIC menu 147 adding a date and time stamp 97 adding bookmarks using the Embedded Web Server 53 using the printer control panel 53 adding bookmarks from the printer control panel 53 adding bookmarks using the Embedded Web Server 53 address book fax using 116 ADF copying using 90 ADF parts cleaning 224 ADF pick assembly ordering 230 Adjusting color 252 adjusting copy quality 94 adjusting Sleep Mode 58 adjusting toner darkness 86 advanced options touch screen copy 100 An error has occurred with the flash drive 252 AppleTalk menu 152 applications list home screen 52 assigning a custom paper type name 72 attaching cables 38 attaching the system board cover 20 available internal options 19 avoiding paper jams 240 Bin Setup menu 145 black and white copying 92 black and white printing 86 blank pages 289 blocking junk faxes 118 buttons printer control panel 14 buttons touch screen 16 C cables Ethernet 38 USB 38 calling customer support 305 canceling print job from computer 88 canceling a print job from a computer 88 from the printer control panel 88 cannot open Embedded Web Server 304 card stock loading in multipurpose feeder 68 tips 81 Change input src to custom type name load orientation 253 Change src t
101. 9 Load Manual Feeder with size 259 Load Manual Feeder with type size 259 Load staples 259 Memory full cannot print faxes 260 Reattach bin x 260 Reattach bin x y 260 Remove packaging material area name 261 Remove paper from linked bin set name 261 Remove paper from all bins 261 Remove paper from bin x 261 Remove paper from standard output bin 261 Restore Held Jobs 261 Scanner automatic feeder cover open 261 Slide finisher to the left 261 Some held jobs were not restored 256 Supply needed to complete job 261 Tray x paper size unsupported 262 Unsupported disk 261 Unsupported USB device please remove 256 printer options troubleshooting 2 000 sheet drawer problems 285 cannot detect flash memory card 286 cannot detect printer hard disk 286 internal print server 287 Internal Solutions Port 286 memory card 287 option not working 284 paper tray problems 285 USB parallel interface card 287 printer problems solving basic 270 printer software installing 40 printhead lenses cleaning 226 printing black and white 86 canceling from printer control panel 88 directory list 85 font sample list 85 forms 53 from flash drive 84 from Macintosh 79 from Windows 79 menu settings page 40 network setup page 40 on letterhead 79 print quality test pages 86 printing a directory list 85 printing a document 79 printing a font sample list 85 printing a menu settings page 40 printing a network setup
102. Baker Notices 507 Palatino Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Stempel Garamond Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Taffy Agfa Corporation Times New Roman The Monotype Corporation plc Univers Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries J All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Federal Communications Commission FCC compliance information statement This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or mo
103. Bright if Eco Mode is Off or set to Paper the factory default setting is Bright Output Lighting Sets the amount of light from the standard bin or an optional Sleep Mode output bin Off Notes Dim Bright f Eco Mode is set to Energy or Energy Paper the factory ng default setting is Off f Eco Mode is Off or set to Paper the factory default setting is Dim Audio Feedback Notes Button Feedback On Off Volume 1 10 Onisthe factory default setting for Button Feedback 5isthe factory default setting for Volume Tactile Touchscreen Feedback On Off Show Bookmarks Yes No Specifies whether the operator panel provides touch sensation feedback Specifies whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area Note Yes is the factory default setting When Yes is selected bookmarks appear in the Held Jobs area Allow Background Removal On Off Specifies whether image background removal is allowed during copy fax e mail FTP or scan to USB Note On is the factory default setting The background of the image will be removed Allow Custom Job Scans On Off Lets you scan multiple jobs to one file Note On is the factory default setting If On is selected the Allow Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific jobs Understanding printer menus 169 Menu item Scanner Jam Recovery Job level Page level Description Specifies how a scanned job should be reloaded if a
104. Cannot detect flash memory card Make sure the flash memory card is securely connected to the printer system board Cannot detect printer hard disk Make sure the printer hard disk is securely connected to the printer system board Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly Try one or more of the following CHECK THE INTERNAL SOLUTIONS Port ISP CONNECTIONS Make sure the ISP is securely connected to the printer system board CHECK THE CABLE Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected to the Internal Solutions ISP port MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY For information on installing the network printing software see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD Troubleshooting 286 Internal print server does not operate correctly Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PRINT SERVER CONNECTIONS Make sure the internal print server is attached securely to the printer system board Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY For more information on installing the network printing software do the following 1 Open the Software and Documentation CD 2 Click Additional 3 Under Publications on this CD select Networking Guide Memory card Make sure the memory card is securely connected to the printer system board USB parallel interface card does no
105. Click Settings gt E mail FTP Settings gt E mail Settings 3 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information 4 Click Submit Creating an e mail shortcut Creating an e mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Under Other Settings click Manage Shortcuts E mail Shortcut Setup 4 Type a unique name for the recipient and then enter the e mail address Note If you are entering multiple addresses then separate each address with a comma 5 Select the scan settings Format Content Color and Resolution 6 Enter a shortcut number and then click Add If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number Creating an e mail shortcut using the touch screen 1 From the home screen navigate to E mail Recipient type an e mail address To create a group of recipients touch Next address and then type the next recipient s e mail address 2 Touch 3 Typeaunique name for the shortcut and then touch Done 4 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct and then touch OK If the name or number is incorrect then
106. Content Type Specifies the type of content that will be scanned for e mailing Text Photo Notes Photo Text Text Photo is the factory default setting Text Photo is used when the original 2 document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Graphics Text is used when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphics is used when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations e Photoisused when the document being scanned is mostly a photo oran image Content Source Color Laser Inkjet Magazine Press Black White Laser Photo Film Newspaper Other Specifies the source of the document being scanned Notes Color Laseris the factory default setting Color Laser is used when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White is used when the original document was printed using a black white laser printer Inkjet is used when the original document was printed using a inkjet printer Photo Film is used when the original document is a photo from film Magazine is used when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper is used when the original document is from a newspaper Press is used when the original document was printed using a printing press Other is used when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Understanding printer menus 190 Menu item Descr
107. Defragment operation Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing Delete fonts macros and other data in printer memory Install additional printer memory 37 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs Touch Continue to clear the message 38 Memory full Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message Cancelthe current print job Install additional printer memory 89 Complex page some data may not have printed Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Cancel the current print job Install additional printer memory 40 color invalid refill change cartridge Replace the specified cartridge to continue printing 51 Defective flash detected Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Cancel the current print job Troubleshooting 263 52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in flash memory are deleted Delete fonts macros and other data stored in flash memory Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card 54 Network x software error Try one or more of the following To
108. Description Font Source Specifies the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu item Resident Notes Disk Download Resident is the factory default setting It shows the factory default set of fonts downloaded in RAM Flash All Flash and Disk settings show all fonts resident in that option Make sure the flash option is properly formatted and is not read write or password protected Download shows all the fonts downloaded in RAM All shows all fonts available to any option Understanding printer menus 212 Menu item Description Font Name Identifies a specific font and where it is stored RO Courier Note RO Courier is the factory default setting The RO Courier format shows the font name font ID and storage location in the printer The font source abbreviation is R for Resident F for Flash K for Disk and D for Download Symbol Set Specifies the symbol set for each font name 10U PC 8 Notes 12U PC 850 10U PC 8 is the US factory default setting 12U PC 850 is the international factory default setting Asymbol set is a set of alphabetical and numeric characters punctuation and special symbols Symbol sets support the different languages or specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text Only the supported symbol sets are shown PCL Emulation Settings Changes the point size for scalable typographic fonts Point Size Notes 1 00 1008 00 12isthe factory default setting Point Size
109. Determines when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder Notes Cassette is the factory default setting Cassette configures the multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual feed print jobs First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source Understanding printer menus 137 Substitute Size menu Menu item Description Substitute Size Substitutes a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available All Listed Notes Off Statement A5 AllListed is the factory default setting All available size substitutions are allowed Letter A4 e Off indicates no size substitutions are allowed e Setting a size substitution lets a printjob continue without a Change Paper message appearing Paper Texture menu Menu item Description Plain Texture Specifies the relative texture of the plain paper loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Rough Smooth Card Stock Texture Specifies the relative texture of the card stock loaded Normal Notes Rough Smooth Normal is the factory default setting Settings appear only if card stock is supported Transparency Texture Specifies the relative texture of the transparencies loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Rough Smooth Recycled Texture Normal Rough Smooth Specifies the relative texture of the recycl
110. From the Embedded Web Server click Settings Solutions Embedded Solutions Scan to Network 2 From Installed Solutions click the name of the application you want to configure 3 Click Configure Export 4 Follow the instructions in the computer screen to save the configuration file and then enter a unique file name or use the default name Note Ifa JVM Out of Memory error occurs then repeat the export until the settings file is saved Importing a configuration 1 From the Embedded Web Server click Settings Solutions Embedded Solutions Scan to Network 2 From Installed Solutions click the name of the application you want to configure 3 Click Configure Import 4 Browse to the saved configuration file and then load or preview it Note If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears refresh the browser and then click Apply Setting up and using the home screen applications 55 Minimizing your printer s environmental impact Lexmarkis committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact on the environment We design with the environment in mind engineer our packaging to reduce materials and provide collection and recycling programs For more information see The Notices chapter The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com environment The Lexmark recycling program at www lexmark com recycle By selecting ce
111. From the home screen navigate to Copy change the copy settings Copy It 3 If you have more pages to scan then place the next document on the scanner glass and then touch Scan the Next Page 4 TouchFinish the Job to return to the home screen Copying film photos 1 Place a photo facedown on the upper left corner of the scanner glass 2 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Content gt Photo gt 4 gt Photo Film gt 4 gt Copy It gt Scan the Next Page or Finish the Job Copying on specialty media Copying on transparencies 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt size of the original document gt 4 Touch Copy to and then select the tray that contains transparencies or touch Manual Feeder Size 5 Loadtransparencies in the multipurpose feeder 6 From the home screen navigate to gt select the desired size of the transparencies gt Manual Feeder Type gt 4 gt Copy It Copying on letterhead 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos
112. Glossy Weight Specifies the relative weight of the glossy paper loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Heavy Light Heavy Glossy Weight Heavy Labels Weight Specifies the relative weight of the glossy paper loaded Note Heavy is the factory default setting Specifies the relative weight of the labels loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Heavy Light Vinyl Labels Weight Specifies the relative weight of vinyl labels loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Heavy Light Bond Weight Specifies the relative weight of the bond paper loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Heavy Light Envelope Weight Specifies the relative weight of the envelopes loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Heavy Light Understanding printer menus 140 Menu item Description Rough Envelope Weight Specifies the relative weight of the envelopes loaded Heavy Note Heavy is the factory default setting Light Normal Letterhead Weight Specifies the relative weight of the letterhead loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Heavy Light Preprinted Weight Specifies the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Heavy Light Colored Weight Specifies the relative weight of the colored paper loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting
113. Hole Punch Box Security Edit Security Setups Miscellaneous Security Settings Confidential Print Disk Wiping Security Audit Log Set Date and Time Option Card Menu Paper Menu Default Source Paper Size Type Configure MP Substitute Size Paper Texture Paper Weight Paper Loading Custom Types Custom Names Custom Scan Sizes Custom Bin Names Universal Setup Bin Setup Network Ports Active NIC Network Standard USB Parallel x Serial x SMTP Setup A list of installed DLEs Download Emulators appears Reports Menu Settings Page Device Statistics Network Setup Page Network x Setup Page Shortcut List Fax Job Log Fax Call Log Copy Shortcuts E mail Shortcuts Fax Shortcuts FTP Shortcuts Profiles List Print Fonts Print Directory Asset Report Help Print All Guides Copy Guide E mail Guide Fax Guide FTP Guide Print Defects Guide Information Guide Supplies Guide Settings General Settings Copy Settings Fax Settings E mail Settings FTP Settings Flash Drive Menu Print Settings Manage Shortcuts Fax Shortcuts E mail Shortcuts FTP Shortcuts Copy Shortcuts Profile Shortcuts Depending on the printer setup this menu item appears as Standard Network or Network x This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed Understanding printer menus 131 Supplies menu Menu item Description Replace Supply Provides the option to reset the supply counter for the Se
114. If you want all the copies of each page to remain together turn Collate off and your copies will be ordered 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 Content This option tells the printer the original document type and source Choose content type from Text Text Photo Photo or Graphic e Text Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art e Graphic Use when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Text Photo Use when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos e Photo Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image Choose content source from Color Laser Black White Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press or Other Color Laser Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Use when the original document was printed using a black white laser printer Inkjet Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer Photo Film Use when the original document is a photo from film Magazine Use when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper Use when the original document is from a newspaper Press Use when the original document was printed using a printing press Other Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Color This option enables or disables color for the scanned image Copyin
115. LEXMARK X790 Series User s Guide August 2010 www lexmark com Machine type s 7562 4917 Model s 432 436 dn1 dn2 gd1 gd2 dt1 dt2 gt1 gt2 df1 df2 gf1 gf2 d01 d02 g01 g02 t01 t02 g91 g92 f01 f02 981 g82 Contents Safety information 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000020 7 Learning about the printer eeeeeeeeeeeeececsesee 9 Thank you for choosing this DPFIEBEL essa cavum Pero Ortu trs rts ton n nU Ton oi e utens 9 Finding information about the pEIBEBE oiii ecce REN RAE RUE scr Pris ctn ip bann RU dr n eua dE 9 Printer IRN CH ERE AM DES onec oo Ie IM DRIED Rouen tidiindtipi qudd edd bab UI C Rt 10 Basic functions of th Cea UM Misco esac eset toe eem stria Fr sets trn epI EE ERU E vapS EHE TIEFE EDS MM DA MAE pA EUIS A irRMS 11 Understanding the ADF and scanner Glass ssssssssssssssssesssesscssscsssssussusssscsssesscessssuccacessecscessesessuccsnceasesscescsssesesesees 12 Using the security lock Fee BUI esa ciioea retener idend ip t edipi ee ent THE 13 Understanding the printer control PaMell ccsssesssnecsoessnessossesesnoesasennssonnssnssonscroseansssierenecnoreonsesessoneesostenesbosvencenoe 14 Understanding the ROME SOFBBPIG meine tice v bp tra Peri ves FRE rris tv er cra Oa rr ocior Pervrs eo NDA A 15 Using the touch screen DUELOFPIS oinnia nah pae ni Qiu prro recur OI Prrkx Innix rU VE Aet OUR pha oon ra uf EK 16 Additional
116. Lexmark International Inc erkl rer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Polski Niniejszym Lexmark International Inc o wiadcza e niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozosta ymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999 5 EC Portugu s A Lexmark International Inc declara que este este produto est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposi es da Diretiva 1999 5 CE Slovensky Lexmark International Inc t mto vyhlasuje e tento produkt sp a z kladn po iadavky a v etky pr slu n ustanovenia smernice 1999 5 ES Slovensko Lexmark International Inc izjavlja da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi dolo ili direktive 1999 5 ES Svenska H rmed intygar Lexmark International Inc att denna produkt st r i verensst mmelse med de v sentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta best mmelser som framg r av direktiv 1999 5 EG Statement of Limited Warranty Lexmark X792de X792dte X792dtfe X792dtpe X792dtme X792dtse Lexmark International Inc Lexington KY This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada For customers outside the U S refer to the country specific warranty information that came with your product This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use and not for resale from Lexmark or a L
117. MENT PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT BY USING THIS PRODUCT YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENT IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS OF THIS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENT PROMPTLY RETURN THE PRODUCT UNUSED AND REQUEST A REFUND OF THE AMOUNT YOU PAID IF YOU ARE INSTALLING THIS PRODUCT FOR USE BY OTHER PARTIES YOU AGREE TO INFORM THE USERS THAT USE OF THE PRODUCT INDICATES ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS Notices 320 LEXMARK SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT This License Agreement Software License Agreement is a legal agreement between you either an individual or a single entity and Lexmark International Inc Lexmark that to the extent your Lexmark product or Software Program is not otherwise subject to a written software license agreement between you and Lexmark or its suppliers governs your use of any Software Program installed on or provided by Lexmark for use in connection with your Lexmark product The term Software Program includes machine readable instructions audio visual content such as images and recordings and associated media printed materials and electronic documentation whether incorporated into distributed with or for use with your Lexmark product 1 STATEMENT OF SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY Lexmark warrants that the media e g diskette or compact disk on which the Software Program if any is furnished is free from
118. N NOE EI Ure NUR RD EON UR 128 Understanding the Scan Center TEA UGS uo itdotcotke Ieive e eode duae e eee ie ean pao oat ole 128 Using the ScanBack DUI n eite rre edicti eiecti te rivers edet re reden elis ale siaSi tnra 128 Understanding scan profile options oos e BE Ri RR OR Gc e e NE AH e v e EAR seese 129 Understanding printer menus eee 131 Menus MIS i sooo re Pe Opere pa pe NP Ope inea Sm co iE 131 Supplies men sssini sae Uere ada adsidua cel nO M dat cce e EAs pO ro Rae 132 Paper MEN lUe P 134 aeree a 146 Network Ports MENU otia Na Ot onada d iS ande dna ran RE d d WO ta duda 147 sls came 160 Settings mien a ete ctt det recited ete bet ee toes teet aet eet esb dee cud ed eg ehe est datae coco eta ee ee veo ope Eee eeepc 165 Helpipierill ss oor det daa Sa e RP Rat Rud obducta aas M mE 217 Contents 4 Securing the printer hard disk and other installed POC Peer UUODES 218 Statement of Volaulity iss ane tet eee asi d ai RP Db RAIN Ma IP Ei itd eda ane 218 Erasirig volatile Terbo Pessoa OR PER IRU A eng mort dtp adt aee ot aed En AMENS a 219 Erasing hion volatile memory sodio e eme n eor ig tabe uten en defin dn 219 Erasinu printet harddisk MEMO aote re D RR Fede a SOROR eal on E dt 219 Configuring printer hard disk encFyptlOhi ao oett iet esset ta euet vite pe eaten aan e 221 Maintainin
119. OM and NAND flash memory Both types are used to store the operating system device settings network information scanner and bookmark settings and embedded solutions Hard disk memory Some devices have a hard disk drive installed The printer hard disk is designed for device specific functionality and cannot be used for long term storage for data that is not print related The hard disk does not provide the capability for users to extract information create folders create disk or network file shares or FTP information directly from a client device The hard disk can retain buffered user data from complex scan print copy and fax jobs as well as form data and font data There are several circumstances under which you might wish to erase the contents of the memory devices installed in your printer A partial list includes The printer is being decommissioned The printer hard drive is being replaced The printer is being moved to a different department or location The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization The printer is being removed from your premises for service Disposing of a hard drive Note Not all printers have a hard disk installed In high security environments it may be necessary to take additional steps to ensure that confidential data stored onthe printer hard disk cannot be accessed once the printer or its hard disk is removed from your premises While most data can be eras
120. Optional spacer Optional 550 sheet trays or 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder Standard 550 sheet trays Printer For information on installing a caster base a 550 or 2 000 sheet optional tray spacer or any of the finishers see the setup documentation that came with the option Installing optional trays The printer supports the following optional input sources 550 sheet tray 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer A CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high capacity input tray a duplex unit and an input option or more than one input option If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters Additional printer setup 37 1 Unpack the optional tray and then remove all packin
121. P address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Checkthe virtual display that appears in the top left corner of the screen The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel showing printer messages Setting up e mail alerts Configure the printer to send you e mail alerts when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed or added or when there is a paper jam 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Under Other Settings click E mail Alert Setup 4 Select the items for notification and type the e mail addresses 5 Click Submit Note For information on setting up the e mail server contact your system support person Viewing reports You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server These reports are useful for assessing the status of the printer the network and supplies To view reports from a network printer 1 Type the printer IP address into the address f
122. RTG REA EE HN SER AUN NUI Gene hee 104 Canceling an eMails e WE RA a RO Raa N ERR FARA RARI uds RN ta em ad 105 Understanding e mail options cete adven eon ona bit madii nd e eiit dd 105 FAXING RE RA 108 Getting the printer ready to 1296 ce sean eee od one NE ROERRHR Ati qu tede eu Re eb 108 Sendibig s FAN cae scvsco czas up qud SI ap iR Dp dnd eben E ER ices RIEN pA TURNO breue eats 114 Creating short CUbs abeo I txt ed i noo ru tup a Met Oa um ei 115 Using shortcuts and the address BOOK uti Run Und dd dE qd nd Ua dd o ee OU UE 116 Customizing fax SETTINGS ceccsecseecseccsecssccsessessscsssesscsssscsesssssuccsscsccssccusssesssccsscsueccsssssssuscsucesssucessccuscnecsscesscsuccsecaseneeses 116 Canceling an OULGOING aR rrisni ne nenia e me ei AR ORO VRAT PAP pP E 118 Understanding fax options esszencia RR E Me Ip e RT DA TH M uan RI DOE 118 Holding ard forwarding faxe Si oon RUD ERAI ROBO ben EID ditat aD EDU name deti dean d 120 Scanning to an FTP address 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000 122 SeanningdtoamtFTPaddt ss see pado oie dba a ip iio RAN E RUE I RRMUN NO BN RU EORR INA 122 Creating shobtelite euren aa dde asd Ope M DRE aeo OVEM aid s o HOD I dra Sa 123 Understancdirig FIPOptoDs scent aite IMMER onsale Rat ales ER IRR oR RS qe b taii eu e n Medus 124 Scanning to a computer or flash drive 127 Scanning tod Eoo a O18 RR RAE 127 Scannibg to a hash drives e aoo d UD RI RENTE
123. SB cable until instructed to do so on the computer screen Eo 2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD 3 Click Recommended Install and then follow the instructions on the computer screen 4 Select Wireless connection when asked to choose a connection type 5 From the Wireless Configuration dialog select Guided Setup Note Choose Advanced Setup only if you want to customize your installation Additional printer setup 43 6 Temporarily connect a USB cable between the computer on the wireless network and the printer Note After the printer is configured the software will instruct you to disconnect the temporary USB cable so you can print wirelessly 7 Follow the instructions on the computer screen 8 Toallow other computers on the wireless network to use the wireless printer follow steps 2 through 6 and step 8for each computer Installing the printer on a wireless network Macintosh Make sure to disconnect the Ethernet cable when installing the printer on a wireless network Prepare to configure the printer 1 Connect the power cable to the printer and then to a properly grounded electrical outlet and then turn the printer on 2 Locate the printer MAC address a From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Network Setup Page b Inthe Standard Network Card section look for UAA MAC Note You will need this information later Additional printer setup 44 Enter the printer information
124. TINGS Print a menu settings page and compare the settings for each tray f necessary adjust the settings from the Paper Size Type menu Note The standard 550 sheet tray and the multipurpose feeder do not automatically sense the paper size You must set the size from the Paper Size Type menu Large jobs do not collate These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following Make sure COLLATE is SET TO ON From the Finishing menu or Print Properties set Collate to On Note Setting Collate to Off in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts the number and complexity of images and the number of pages in the job MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS ENOUGH MEMORY Add printer memory or an optional hard disk Unexpected page breaks INCREASE THE PRINT TIMEOUT VALUE 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Timeouts gt Print Timeout 2 Increase the Print Timeout value and then touch s Solving copy problems Copier does not respond These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages CHECK THE POWER Make sure the printer is plugged in the power is on and Ready appears Troubleshooting 273 Scanner unit does not close Make sure there are no obstructions 1 Lift
125. U S and other countries PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett Packard Company PCL is Hewlett Packard Company s designation of a set of printer commands language and functions included in its printer products This printer is intended to be compatible with the PCL language This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application programs and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies Albertus The Monotype Corporation plc Antique Olive Monsieur Marcel OLIVE Apple Chancery Apple Computer Inc Arial The Monotype Corporation plc CG Times Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc is a product of Agfa Corporation Chicago Apple Computer Inc Clarendon Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Eurostile Nebiolo Geneva Apple Computer Inc GillSans The Monotype Corporation plc Helvetica Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Hoefler Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation ITC Bookman International Typeface Corporation ITC Mona Lisa International Typeface Corporation ITC Zapf Chancery International Typeface Corporation Joanna The Monotype Corporation plc Marigold Arthur Baker Monaco Apple Computer Inc New York Apple Computer Inc Oxford Arthur
126. UR 239 Clearing TAINS REM 240 Pororcihithla Sassari odi opine Tse da rade a vd tla iquam PR dae dient aon dictas ENARA ed 240 Understanding jam numbers and locations oo viene oe treo n debitos ie ente inae BUE pe eK 240 DOO DAD SM AUN s eere eret recette ea itis de taulle Be sansttes tute a aa a a a e tots 242 PANE SEIN taodtawnahecne 242 202 203 paper JdlIms dei Re e eR ee CUR Ee et eiit te tene Cede t dete eite ee E decies 243 230 DAD EM AIM eo meet nnen e aea a ea a a vien ise cstedecndee tude sstces ete aa dede 244 Contents 5 DSN 22 Paper Iz a Meer E RN 245 24X DA DEN a A IAE LU ctacestle 245 250 Paper aM ack eR he risen et eee Ree nate e peg eee adie egeo pe eere Eod E te ede petto ves eee eee e odo 246 290 289 AP ele aM Sranan ceca a ae e I E E A E A RISO a a MEE SRU 247 290 292 papet Ja MS sssrin ieies oe es Vete del ind ihe eter a EEA Ae aa E ESES etae bed ca N aa 248 400 403 and 460 461 paper didis oda RISE ERREUR USER UD E Uu eR PCR b UE t NR 248 431 438 Paper Jatrs ct o e RE TEES RERUM UE oye ttt E o e ERE Eh 249 455 StMDIG Ff g pe ps ee d d m too ed pov io Ead le i d i hu roa orti 249 FFOUDIGSNOOUNG RR DE 252 Thedndieator lahtisdlinkibi6 oe ruit oO NOU Mon ome obest di 252 Understanding Printer MESSAGES ois orina Ra datei i ont b dins n an qnt dde tn bee E 252 Solving basieprinter DIO BIEMS Gauci suncnoinsadsou smn R ED Ra DD a eO ed 270 Solvind printing problems s adopt ebbe E RR PR ene aoe MN Ro
127. USING A RECOMMENDED USB SERIAL OR ETHERNET CABLE For more information visit the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com MAKE SURE PRINTER CABLES ARE SECURELY CONNECTED Check the cable connections to the printer and print server to make sure they are secure For more information see the setup documentation that came with the printer Confidential and other held jobs do not print These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following PARTIAL JOB NO JOB OR BLANK PAGE PRINTS The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data Delete the print job and then print it again For PDF documents recreate the PDF and then print it again If you are printing from the Internet then the printer may be reading multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting all jobs except the first one For Windows users open Print Properties From the Print and Hold dialog select the Keep duplicate documents check box under the User name text box before entering a PIN number For Macintosh users save each print job naming each job differently and then send the individual jobs to the printer Troubleshooting 271 MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS SUFFICIENT MEMORY Free up additional printer memory by scrolling through the list of held jobs and deleting some of them Print job takes longer than expected Try one or more of the following REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB Eliminate the number and size of fon
128. Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner Inks that are oxidation set or oil based generally meet these requirements latex inks might not When in doubt contact the paper supplier Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 190 C 374 F without melting or releasing hazardous emissions Using recycled paper and other office papers As an environmentally conscientious company Lexmark supports the use of recycled paper produced specifically for use in laser electrophotographic printers While no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well Lexmark consistently tests papers that represent recycled cut size copier papers available on the global market This scientific testing is conducted with rigorand discipline Many factors are taken into consideration both separately and as a whole including the following Amount of post consumer waste Lexmark tests up to 10096 post consumer waste content Temperature and humidity conditions Testing chambers simulate climates from all over the world e Moisture content Business papers should have low moisture 4 5 Bending resistance and proper stiffness means optimum feeding through the printer Thickness impacts how much can be loaded into a tray Surface roughness measured in Sheffield units impacts print clarity and how well toner fuses to the paper Surface friction determines how easily sheets can be s
129. Windows users specify the size from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog Troubleshooting 277 Cannot scan from a computer These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages CHECK THE POWER Make sure the printer is plugged in the power is on and Ready appears CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer Solving fax problems Caller ID is not shown Contact your telecommunications company to verify that your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns you may have to change the default setting There are two settings available FSK pattern 1 and DTMF pattern 2 The availability of these settings by way of the Fax menu depends on whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns Contact your telecommunications company to determine which pattern or switch setting to use Cannot send or receive a fax These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages CHECK THE POWER Make sure the printer is plugged in the power is on and Ready appears CHECK THE PRINTER CONNECTIONS Make sure the cable connections for the following hardware are secure if applicable Teleph
130. a set depends on the scan source e f you scan a document on the scanner glass then a set consists of one page e If you scan multiple pages using the ADF then a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF becomes empty f you scan one page using the ADF then a set consists of one page For example 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Options gt Custom Job gt On gt Done gt Copy It When the end of a set is reached the scan screen appears 4 Load the next document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass and then touch Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed Note If required change the job settings 5 f you have another document to scan then repeat the previous step Otherwise touch Finish the job Copying 96 Placing information on copies Placing the date and time at the top of each page 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings in
131. able Lexmark hereby limits its liability for breach of those provisions to one of the following providing you a replacement copy of the Software Program or reimbursement of the price paid for the Software Program TheSoftware Program may include internetlinks to other software applications and or internet web pages hosted and operated by third parties unaffiliated with Lexmark You acknowledge and agree that Lexmark is not responsible in any way for the hosting performance operation maintenance or content of such software applications and or internet web pages 3 LIMITATION OF REMEDY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW ANY AND ALL LIABILITY OFLEXMARK UNDERTHIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE GREATER OF THE PRICE PAID FOR THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM AND FIVE U S DOLLARS OR THE EQUIVALENT IN LOCAL CURRENCY YOUR SOLE REMEDY AGAINST LEXMARK IN ANY DISPUTE UNDER THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL BE TO SEEK TO RECOVER ONE OF THESE AMOUNTS UPON PAYMENT OF WHICH LEXMARK SHALL BE RELEASED AND DISCHARGED OF ALL FURTHER OBLIGATIONS AND LIABILITY TO YOU IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK ITS SUPPLIERS SUBSIDIARIES OR RESELLERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INCIDENTAL INDIRECT EXEMPLARY PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS OR REVENUES LOST SAVINGS INTERRUPTION OF USE OR ANY LOSS OF INACCURACY IN OR DAMAGETO DATA OR RECORDS FOR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES OR DAMAGE TO REAL ORTANGIBLE
132. ace sheet printable stock and topcoats can withstand up to 25 psi 172 kPa pressure without delaminating oozing around the edges or releasing hazardous fumes Do not use labels with slick backing material e Use full label sheets Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing resulting in a jam Partial sheets also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive and could void the printer and cartridge warranties Donotuse labels with exposed adhesive Do not print within 1 mm 0 04 in of the edge of the label of the perforations or between die cuts of the label Be sure adhesive backing does not reach to the sheet edge Zone coating of the adhesive at least 1 mm 0 04 in away from edges is recommended Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the warranty e If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible remove a 1 6 mm 0 06 in strip on the leading and driver edge and use a non oozing adhesive Portrait orientation works best especially when printing bar codes Tips on using card stock Card stockis heavy single ply specialty media Many ofits variable characteristics such as moisture content thickness and texture can significantly impact print quality Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities When printing on card stock Make sure the Paper Type is Card Stock Select the appropriate Paper Texture setting Be aware
133. ace to bind or hole punch copies Use the increase or decrease arrows to set how much of a margin you want If the additional margin is too large then the copy will be cropped Edge Erase This lets you eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan Header Footer This allows you to turn on the Date Time Page number Bates number or Custom text and prints them in the specified header or footer location Overlay This lets you create a watermark or message that overlays the content of your copy You can choose between Urgent Confidential Copy and Draft or you can enter a custom message in the Enter custom text field The word you pick will appear faintly in large print across each page Note A custom overlay can also be created by your system support person When a custom overlay is created a button with an icon of that overlay will be available Advanced Duplex This lets you control whether the documents are one sided or two sided what orientation your original documents have and how your documents are bound Note Some Advanced Duplex options may not be available on all printer models Save As Shortcut This option allows the current settings to be saved as a shortcut by assigning a number Copyi
134. acity you can purchase other optional exit bins Note Not all exit bins support every paper size and type 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Paper Menu gt Bin Setup 2 Touch the bin or bins you want to link and then touch Configure Bins Link Assigning a custom paper type name Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays From the home screen navigate to gt gt Paper Menu gt Paper Size Type gt select a custom paper type name gt select a tray gt Submit Creating a custom name for a paper type If the printer is on a network you can use the Embedded Web Server to define a name other than Custom Type x for each of the custom paper types loaded into the printer 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Paper Menu gt Custom Name gt type a name gt Submit Note This custom name will replace the Custom Type x name under the Custom Types and Paper Size and Type menus 3 Click Custom Types select a paper type Submit Configuring a custom name If the printer is on a network then you can use the Embedded Web Server to define a name
135. ack and side to side to evenly distribute the toner 6 Remove the red packing strip from the new cartridge x dip P I 7 Insert the new cartridge into the printer and then push the green handle back in place Note Make sure the cartridge is fully pushed in Maintaining the printer 233 8 Close the front door Replacing the waste toner bottle Replace the waste toner bottle when 82 xx Replace waste toner bottle appears The printer will not continue printing until the waste toner bottle is replaced 1 Remove the replacement waste toner bottle from its shipping box and then unpack it 2 Open the printer front door and then open tray 1 3 Pullthe green tabs sideways and then grasp and pull the tabs with both hands to remove the waste toner bottle 4 Place the waste toner bottle in the recycling bag Maintaining the printer 234 5 Place the bag into the shipping box you removed the replacement part from 8 Closetray 1 and then close the front door Moving the printer Before moving the printer A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Before moving the printer follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage Maintaining the printer 235 Turn the printer off using the power switch and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Disconn
136. akes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device including fax machines to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business other entity or individual The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long distance transmission charges See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications The Ringer Equivalence Number REN isan indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The terminus of an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling Telephone companies report that electrical surges typically lightning transients are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources This has been identified as a major nationwide problem It is recommended that the cus
137. all scan functions Specifies whether the transmission log prints Note Print log is the factory default setting Log Paper Source Tray x Manual Feeder Specifies a paper source for FTP logs Note Tray 1 isthe factory default setting Log Output Bin Standard Bin Bin x Specifies an exit bin for FTP logs Notes Standard Bin is the factory default setting Bin x only appears when at least one optional exit bin is installed FTP bit Depth 8 bit 1 bit Enables the Text Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images when Color is set to Off Note 8 bit is the factory default setting Base File Name Lets you enter a base file name Note There is an image limitation of 53 characters Custom Job Scanning Off On Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job Note Off is the factory default setting Scan Preview Off On Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Allow Save as Shortcut On Off Enables shortcut creation for FTP addresses Note On is the factory default setting Background Removal 4to4 Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting Enables an equal balance of colors in the output Understanding printer menus 197 Menu item Color D
138. an View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Under Other Settings click Manage Shortcuts Note A password may be required If you do not have an ID and password get one from your system support person 4 Click FTP Shortcut Setup 5 Enterthe appropriate information 6 Enter a shortcut number If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number 7 Click Add Scanning to an FTP address 123 Creating an FTP shortcut using the touch screen 1 From the home screen navigate to FTP gt type the FTP address gt gt enter a name for the shortcut gt Done 2 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct and then touch OK If the name or number is incorrect then touch Cancel and then reenter the information If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number 3 Touch Submit Understanding FTP options FTP This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination Note Addresses should be in dot notation form for example yyy yyy YYY yyy File Name This option lets you enter the file name of the scanned document Original Size This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to copy Touc
139. and Time input date time Lets you set the date and time for the printer Note Date and time are set in YYYY MM DD HH MM format Time Zone list of time zones Lets you set the time zone for the printer Note GMT is the factory default setting Automatically Observe DST On Off Enables Daylight Saving Time associated with the set time zone Note On is the factory default setting Custom Time Zone UTC Offset DST Start Week DST Start Day DST Start Month DST Start Time DST End Week DST End Day DST End Month DST End Time DST Offset Sets a custom time zone Enable NTP On Off Enables Network Time Protocol which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a network Notes Onisthe factory default setting Use this recommended date and time setting Understanding printer menus 164 Settings menu General Settings menu Menu item Description Display Language Sets the language of the text appearing on the display English Note All languages may not be available for all printers Francais Deutsch Italiano Espanol Greek Dansk Norsk Nederlands Svenska Portuguese Suomi Russian Polski Magyar Turkce Cesky Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean Japanese Eco Mode Minimizes the use of energy paper or specialty media Off Notes Energy Energy Paper e Off is the factory default setting Off resets the printer to its Paber factory default settings p Energy m
140. and all other systems and devices are powered down safely Note The Hibernate and Sleep modes can be scheduled Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings General Settings Sleep Button Settings 3 From the Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button drop down select Hibernate 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button gt Hibernate 2 Touch Submit Adjusting the brightness of the display To save energy or if you have trouble reading your display then adjust the brightness of the display Available settings range from 20 100 The factory default setting is 100 Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Se
141. and then click the IP tab c Type the IP address of your printer in the Address field and then click Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier a From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Utilities b Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center c From the Printer List click Add and then click IP Printer d Typethe IP address of your printer in the Address field and then click Add For AppleTalk printing Note Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer In Mac OS X version 10 5 a From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences Print amp Fax b Click and then navigate to AppleTalk gt select the printer from the list gt Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier a From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Utilities Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center From the Printer List click Add Click the Default Browser tab gt More Printers From the first pop up menu select AppleTalk From the second pop up menu select Local AppleTalk Zone Select the printer from the list and then click Add e D anoo Setting up serial printing In serial printing data is transferred one bit at a time Although serial printing is usually slower than parallel printing it is the preferred option when there is a great deal of distance between the printer and computer or when an interface with a better transfer rate is not available Additional printer setup 50 After installing the
142. ard disk Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Mac Binary PS Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs Auto Notes On Off Auto is the factory default setting On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs Offfilters print jobs using the standard protocol ENA Address Sets the network address information for an external print server YYY YYY YYY YYY Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port ENA Netmask Sets the netmask information for an external print server YYY YYY YYY yyy Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port ENA Gateway Sets the gateway information for an external print server YYY YYY YYY yyy Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port d Understanding printer menus 154 Parallel x menu Menu item Description PCL SmartSwitch Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received On through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes On is the factory default setting When set
143. assigned to the printer driver Note Make sure the serial parameters in the COM port match the serial parameters you set in the printer a Open the Device Manager 1 Click or click Start and then click Run 2 Inthe Start Search or Run box type devmgmt msc 3 Press Enter or click OK Look for Ports and then click to expand the list of available ports Right click the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer example COM1 Click Properties On the Port Settings tab set the serial parameters to the same serial parameters in the printer Check the serial heading of the menu settings page for the printer settings onan go h Click OK and then close all the windows Print a test page to verify printer installation Additional printer setup 51 Setting up and using the home screen applications Making the home screen applications work for you Button Function Forms and Favorites Allows you to access frequently used forms and bookmarks Creates your own index of forms information sheets and other materials you E print often a To print a form see Printing forms on page 53 3 E LI c Scan to Network Lets users scan their documents to specified network destinations You can set up and use the home screen applications by using the home screen buttons or the Embedded Web Server To open the Embedded Web Server type your printer IP address into the ad
144. at toner is distributed evenly among all four print cartridges or whichever color has the shadow images 1 Remove the print cartridge Warning Potential Damage Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs 2 Firmly shake the cartridge side to side and front to back several times to redistribute the toner 3 Reinsert the print cartridge Note If print quality does not improve replace the print cartridge of the color that is giving a shadow If the problem continues the printer may need to be serviced For more information contact customer support Troubleshooting 291 Gray background on prints CHECK THE BACKGROUND DARKNESS OR REMOVAL SETTING Try one or more of the following Adjustthe darkness to a lighter setting ncrease the background removal setting MAKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN OR DEFECTIVE PRINT CARTRIDGE Replace the worn or defective print cartridge Incorrect margins ABC DEF These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Size setting 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting For Windows users specify the size from Print Prop
145. ate job 263 37 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted 263 38 Memory full 263 39 Complex page some data may not have printed 263 40 color invalid refill change cartridge 263 51 Defective flash detected 263 52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 264 54 Network x software error 264 54 Serial option x error 264 54 Standard network software error 264 55 Unsupported option in slot x 264 56 Parallel port x disabled 265 56 Serial port x disabled 265 56 Standard parallel port disabled 265 56 Standard USB port disabled 265 56 USB port x disabled 265 57 Configuration change some held jobs were not restored 265 58 Input config error 266 58 Too many bins attached 266 58 Too many disks installed 266 58 Too many flash options installed 266 58 Too many trays attached 266 59 Incompatible output bin x 267 61 Remove defective disk 267 62 Disk full 267 80 xx Fuser life warning 267 80 xx Fuser missing 267 80 xx Fuser near life warning 267 80 xx Replace fuser 267 82 xx Replace waste toner bottle 268 82 xx Waste toner bottle missing 268 82 xx Waste toner bottle nearly full 268 83 xx Replace transfer module 268 83 xx Transfer module life warning 268 83 xx Transfer module missing 268 840 01 Scanner disabled by admin 269 840 02 Scanner disabled Contact system administrator if problem persists 269 88 xx Color cartridge critically low 269 88 xx color cartridge lo
146. ation settings brightness adjusting 59 Quiet Mode 57 Sleep Mode 58 59 standard exit bin lighting 60 conserving supplies 56 contacting customer support 305 control panel printer 14 copy quality adjusting 94 COpy screen advanced options 100 options 98 99 100 125 Copy Settings menu 172 copy troubleshooting copier does not respond 273 partial document or photo copies 275 poor copy quality 274 poor scanned image quality 277 scanner unit does not close 274 Index 326 copying adding a date and time stamp 97 adding an overlay message 97 adjusting quality 94 canceling a copy job 97 98 collating copies 95 custom job job build 96 different paper sizes 93 enlarging 94 in black and white 92 multiple pages on one sheet 96 on both sides of the paper duplexing 93 on letterhead 91 on transparencies 91 photos 91 placing separator sheets between copies 95 quick copy 90 reducing 94 selecting atray 92 toa different size 92 using the ADF 90 using the scanner glass flatbed 91 copying different paper sizes 93 copying multiple pages on one sheet 96 copying on both sides of the paper duplexing 93 copying on letterhead 91 copying on transparencies 91 copying photos 91 corrupted printer hard disk 255 creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 115 creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 123 creating profiles using the ScanBack Utility 128 Custom Bin Names menu 144 custom name configu
147. attendance message affects a function this icon appears and the red indicator light blinks Learning about the printer 18 Additional printer setup Installing internal options A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer You can customize your printer connectivity and memory capacity by adding optional cards The instructions in this section explain how to install the available cards you can also use them to locate a card for removal Available internal options Memory cards Printer memory Flash memory Fonts Firmware cards Bar Code PrintCryption M Lexmark Internal Solutions Ports ISP RS 232 C Serial ISP Parallel 1284 B ISP MarkNet N8250 802 11 b g n Wireless ISP MarkNet N8130 10 100 Fiber ISP MarkNet N8120 10 100 1000 Ethernet ISP Additional printer setup 19 Accessing the system board CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other de
148. b is canceled the copy screen appears Copying 97 Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed 1 From the home screen touch Cancel Job or press S on the keypad 2 Touch the job you want to cancel 3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs Understanding the copy screens and options Copy from This option opens a screen where you can enter the size of the documents you are going to copy Touch a paper size button to select it as the Copy from setting The copy screen appears with your new setting displayed When Copy from is set to Mixed Letter Legal you can copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes When Copy from is set to Auto Size Sense the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document Copy to This option opens a screen where you can enter the size and type of paper on which your copies will be printed Touch a paper size button to select it as the Copy to setting The copy screen appears with your new setting displayed e Ifthe size settings for Copy from and Copy to are different the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting to accommodate the difference e If the type or size of paper that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays touch Manual Feeder and manually send the paper through the multipurpose feeder When Copy to is setto Auto Size Match each copy matches the size of the original document If a matching paper size is not in one of the t
149. be placed between copies If Collate is set to Off then the separator sheets are added to the end of the print job 4 Select one of the following Between Copies Between Jobs Between Pages None 5 Touch and then Copy It Copying 95 Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet In order to save paper you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple page document onto a single sheet of paper Notes The Paper Size must be set to Letter Legal A4 or JIS B5 The Copy Size must be set to 100 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Advanced Options gt Paper Saver gt select desired output gt 4 gt Copy It Creating a custom copy job job build The custom copy job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job Each set may be scanned using different job parameters When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled the scanner scans the first set of original documents using the supplied parameters and then it scans the next set with the same or different parameters The definition of
150. ble is the factory default setting Network Mode Specifies the network mode Ad hoc Notes Infrastructure Ad hocis the factory default setting This configures wireless connection directly between the printer and a computer e Infrastructure lets the printer access anetwork using an access point Compatibility Specifies the wireless standard for the wireless network 802 11b g n Note The 802 11b g n is the factory default setting 802 11n 802 11b g Choose Network Lets you select an available network for the printer to use list of available networks View Signal Quality Lets you view the quality of the wireless connection View Security Mode Lets you view the encryption method that a wireless network uses Note Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS is a simple and secure configuration that allows you to establish a wireless network and enable network security without requiring prior knowledge of Wi Fi technology It is no longer necessary to configure the network name SSID and WEP key or WPA passphrase for network devices AppleTalk menu This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Understanding printer menus 152 Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network x gt Standard Network Setup or Network x Setup gt AppleTalk Activate Activates AppleTalk support Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No View Name Shows the assigned AppleTalk name Note The name can be changed only from t
151. ble resources and 5 255 sec continues to print other jobs in the print queue Notes 30 seconds is the factory default setting This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed Print Recovery Auto Continue Disabled 5 255 Lets the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline situations when not resolved within the specified time period Note Disabled is the factory default setting Print Recovery Jam Recovery Auto On Off Specifies whether the printer reprints jammed pages Notes Auto is the factory default setting The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages Understanding printer menus 171 Print Recovery Page Protect Off On Menu item Description Lets the printer successfully printa page that may not have printed otherwise Notes e Offisthe factory default setting Off prints a partial page when there is not enough memory to print the whole page On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the entire page prints Press Sleep Button Sleep Hibernate Do nothing Determines how the scanner while in Idle state reacts to a short press of the Sleep button Note Sleep is the factory default setting Press and Hold Sleep Button Do nothing Sleep Hibernate
152. ceive a fax 278 received fax has poor print quality 281 troubleshooting paper feed message remains after jam is cleared 288 troubleshooting print error reading USB drive 270 held jobs do not print 271 incorrect characters print 272 incorrect margins 292 jammed pages are not reprinted 288 job prints from wrong tray 272 job prints on wrong paper 272 jobs do not print 270 Large jobs do not collate 273 multiple language PDF files do not print 270 paper curl 293 paper frequently jams 287 print job takes longer than expected 272 tray linking does not work 272 unexpected page breaks 273 troubleshooting print quality black streaks on a page 297 blank pages 289 characters have jagged edges 289 clipped images 290 colors not aligned properly 290 fine horizontal lines 291 gray background on prints 292 isolating print quality problems 288 light colored line white line or incorrectly colored line appears on prints 293 poor transparency quality 301 print irregularities 293 print is too dark 294 print is too light 295 repeating print defects 296 shadow images appear on prints 291 skewed print 296 solid color or black pages appear on prints 297 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 298 streaked vertical lines 298 Index 334 toner fog or background shading 299 toner rubs off 300 toner specks 300 uneven print density 301 white streaks on a page 297 troubleshooting printer options 2 000 sheet drawer problems 285 canno
153. cellaneous menu 161 moving the printer 235 236 multipurpose feeder loading 68 Network x menu 147 Network Card menu 149 network options 19 Network Reports menu 149 network setup page printing 40 Networking Guide where to find 237 noise emission levels 309 non volatile memory 218 erasing 219 notices 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 O options 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder installing 37 550 sheet tray installing 37 fax card 19 firmware card 25 firmware cards 19 flash memory card 25 Internal Solutions Port installing 27 memory card installing 23 memory cards 19 network 19 order of installation 37 ports 19 printer hard disk installing 31 printer hard disk removing 36 updating in printer driver 41 options touch screen copy 98 99 100 125 e mail 105 106 107 fax 119 120 FTP 124 125 126 scan to computer 129 130 ordering cleaning kit 231 fuser or transfer module 230 print cartridges 229 staple cartridges 230 waste toner bottle 230 ordering a print cartridge 229 output file type changing 104 P paper characteristics 73 different sizes copying 93 letterhead 74 preprinted forms 74 recycled 74 saving 96 selecting 74 storing 76 unacceptable 74 Universal Paper Size 144 Universal size setting 62 using recycled 56 paper feed troubleshooting message remains after jam is cleared 288 paper jams avoiding 240 paper jams clearing 200 paper jam 24
154. ck Submit Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen Ashortcut number was automatically assigned when you clicked Submit You can usethis shortcut number when you are ready to scan your documents a Loadan original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass b Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides Scanning to a computer or flash drive 127 Press and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad or touch Held Jobs on the home screen and then touch Profiles d After entering the shortcut number the scanner scans and sends the document to the directory or program you specified If you touched Profiles on the home screen then locate your shortcut on the list 8 Return to the computer to view the file The output file is saved in the location or launched in the program you specified Scanning to a flash drive 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Insert the fla
155. d Stock Embedded Web Server or from MarkVision Professional Transparency Notes rad Paper is the factory default setti Rough Cottoh aper is the factory default setting Labels The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source Vinyl Labels Envelope Recycled Specifies a paper type when the Recycled setting is selected in other menus Paper Notes Card Stock Transparency Paperis the factory default setting Glossy The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or Rough Cotton multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source Labels Vinyl Labels Envelope Custom Names menu Definition Custom Name x Specify a custom name for a paper type This name replaces the Custom none Type x name in the printer menus Understanding printer menus 143 Custom Bin Names menu Description Standard Bin Specifies a custom name for the Standard Bin Bin x Specifies a custom name for Bin x Custom Scan Sizes menu Menu item Description Custom Scan Size x Specifies a custom scan size name scan sizes and options The custom scan Scan Size Name size name replaces Custom Scan Size x inthe printer menus Width Notes 1 8 5 inches 25 215 9 mm l Hei 8 5 inches is the US factory default setting for Width 210 millimeters is eight the international factory default setting for Width 1 25 inches 25 6
156. d in the tray or feeder 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings 2 Before sending the print job specify the correct paper type setting For Windows users specify the paper type from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the paper type from the Print dialog AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE PRINT CARTRIDGE Replace the worn or defective print cartridge MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER BELT IS NOT DEFECTIVE Replace the defective transfer belt For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part MAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT DEFECTIVE Replace the defective fuser For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part Print is too dark ABC DEF Try one or more of the following LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES Troubleshooting 294 CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type setting For Windows users check this setting from Print Properties For Macintosh users check this setting from the Print dialog MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE PRINT CARTRIDGE Replace the defective pr
157. d of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup 3 IntheRings to Answer field enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before the printer answers 4 Click Submit REPLACE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE Replace the toner or print cartridge Can receive but not send faxes These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following THE PRINTER IS NOT IN FAX MODE On the home screen touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode THE DOCUMENT IS NOT LOADED PROPERLY Load the original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass Troubleshooting 280 MAKE SURE THE SHORTCUT NUMBER IS SET UP PROPERLY Checkto make sure the shortcut number has been programmed for the number that you want to dial Asan alternative dial the telephone number manually Received fax has poor print quality Try one or more of the following RESEND THE DOCUMENT Ask the person who sent you the fax to Ch
158. d when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Fax Resolution Standard Fine 200 dpi Super Fine 300 dpi Ultra Fine 600 dpi Specifies the resolution level for scan to fax Darkness 1 9 Lightens or darkens the output Note 5 factory default setting Orientation Portrait Landscape Specifies the orientation of the scanned image Original Size Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Universal 4x6in 3xbin Business Card Custom Scan Size x A4 A5 Oficio Mexico JIS B4 JIS B5 Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned Note Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Understanding printer menus 188 Use Multi Page TIFF On Off Enable Analog Receive Off On Menu item Description Provides a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files Fora multiple page scan to fax job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Notes e Onis the factory default setting This menu item applies to all scan functions Enables analog fax receive Note Off is the factory default setting E mail Settings menu E mail Server Setup Subject Message Base file name Menu item Description Specifies e mail server information Note
159. defects in materials and workmanship under normal use during the warranty period The warranty period is ninety 90 days and commences on the date the Software Program is delivered to the original end user This limited warranty applies only to Software Program media purchased new from Lexmark or an Authorized Lexmark Reseller or Distributor Lexmark will replace the Software Program should it be determined that the media does not conform to this limited warranty 2 DISCLAIMER AND LIMITATION OF WARRANTIES EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT AND TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW LEXMARK AND ITS SUPPLIERS PROVIDE THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM AS IS AND HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO TITLE NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND ABSENCE OF VIRUSES ALL WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT LEXMARK CANNOT BY LAW DISCLAIM ANY COMPONENT OF THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE LEXMARK LIMITS THE DURATION OF SUCH WARRANTIES TO THE 90 DAY TERM OF THE EXPRESS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY This Agreement is to be read in conjunction with certain statutory provisions as that may be in force from time to time that imply warranties or conditions or impose obligations on Lexmark that cannot be excluded or modified If any such provisions apply then to the extent Lexmark is
160. des For example if the original document is six sheets the copy is three sheets with printing on both sides 2sidedto 1 sided The original page has printing on both sides while the copied page will have printing on only one side For example if the original document is three sheets with an image on each side of each sheet then the copy is six sheets with only one image on one side of each sheet 2sidedto2 sided The original page has printing on both sides and the copy mimics the original exactly Paper Saver Allows copying two or four sheets of a document on one page Off Note Off is the factory default setting 20n 1 Portrait 20n 1 Landscape 4on 1 Portrait 4 on 1 Landscape Understanding printer menus 173 Menu item Description Print Page Borders Specifies whether or not a border is printed around the edge of the page Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Collate Keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies On 1 2 1 2 1 2 Note On is the factory default setting Off 1 1 1 2 2 2 Punch Determines the type of hole punch finishing to be used in a print or copy job Off Note Off is the factory default setting 2 holes 3 holes 4 holes Staple Lets you enable or disable the staple finisher Off Notes On Offis the factory default setting This menu only appears when a staple finisher is installed Original Size Specifies the paper size of the original documen
161. dial tone Enable ECM Yes No Enables Error Correction Mode for fax jobs Enable Fax Scans On Off Lets you fax files that are scanned at the computer Driver to fax Yes No Allows the driver to fax jobs to be sent by the printer Allow Save as Shortcut On Off Dial Mode Tone Pulse Lets you save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer Specifies the dialing sound either as a tone or a pulse Understanding printer menus 182 Max Speed 2400 4800 9600 14400 33600 Menu item Description Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent Custom Job scanning Off On Scan Preview Off On Lets you scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs Background Removal 4to4 Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Enables an equal balance of colors in the output Color Dropout Color Dropout Specifies which color to drop during faxing and how much to increase or decrease the dropout None Notes Red ue None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout Blue 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Contrast Specifies the contrast of the outp
162. difications to this equipment Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Note To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing device use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for USB attach Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC regulations Modular component notice This product contains the following modular component s Lexmark regulatory type model LEX M01 003 FCC ID IYLMO1003 IC 2376A M01003 Licensing notices The following documents can be viewed from the installation software CD Directory File CDALEGAL FW License pdf mDNS tar gz Expat txt Inst_lib txt Instgui txt Instgui zip Notices 308 Noise emission levels The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296 Note Some modes may not apply to your product 1 meter average sound pressure dBA Printing 53 dBA Ready 35 dBA Values are subject to change See www lexmark com for current values Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE directive The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European Union We encourage the recycling of our products If you have further questi
163. ding printer menus 198 Flash Drive menu Scan Settings Menu item Description Format Specifies the format of the file to be sent through FTP PDF pdf Note PDF pdf is the factory default setting Secure PDF TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps PDF Version Sets the version of the PDF file to be sent through FTP 1 2 1 6 Note 1 5 is the factory default setting A 1a Content Type Specifies the type of content that will be scanned through FTP Text Photo Notes Photo Text Text Photo is the factory default setting Text Photo is used when the original Graphics document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Text is used when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphics is used when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations e Photo is used when the document being scanned is mostly a photo oran image Content Source Specifies the source of content in the scan job Color Laser Notes Inkjet Photo Film Color Laser is the factory default setting Color Laser is used when the original M gaziti document was printed using a color laser printer Newspaper Black White is used when the original document was printed using a 3 pap black white laser printer ress Other Inkjet is used when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer Black and White Laser Photo Film is used when the original document is a photo from film
164. dress field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Network Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Configuring Forms and Favorites The Forms and Favorites solution provides users with quick and easy access to frequently used forms or other information that is regularly printed The printer Bookmark function is used to create a link to a form or electronic file at a predetermined URL or network location These files are then accessed from the Forms and Favorites icon When adding bookmarks from the printer Embedded Web Server more configuration options are available than when adding bookmarks from the printer control panel Setting up and using the home screen applications 52 Adding bookmarks using the printer control panel Note Bookmarks added from the printer control panel must be edited from the printer Embedded Web Server 1 From the home screen navigate to Forms and Favorites Create Bookmark enter a name for the new bookmark Submit This name will be displayed in the Forms menu when selecting a form to print 2 Select Network FTP HTTP or HTTPS to specify the network location or the protocol of the bookmark and then touch Submit 3 Choose an authentication option or enter the URL or network location of the form No
165. e 1 sided is the factory default setting Duplex Binding Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of the page Long Edge is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page Short Edge Notes Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape Shortedge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape Paper Saver Orientation Specifies the orientation of a multiple page document Auto Note Auto is the factory default setting The printer chooses between portrait and Landscape landscape Portrait Paper Saver Specifies that multiple page images be printed on one side of a paper Off Notes 2 Up 3 Up Offis the factory default setting 4 Up The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side 6 Up 9 Up 12 Up 16 Up Paper Saver Border Prints a border around each page image None Note None is the factory default setting Solid Paper Saver Ordering Specifies the positioning of multiple page images Horizontal Reverse Horizontal Reverse Vertical Vertical Notes Horizontal is the factory default setting Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation Understanding printer menus 203 Separator Sheets Specifies whether blank separator sheets are inserted None
166. e reduced or disabled including those made by the fax speaker and ringer The fax is placed in standby mode Thealarmcontrol and cartridge alarm sounds are turned off The printer will ignore the Advance Start command Adjusting Sleep Mode To save energy you can decrease the number of minutes before the printer enters Sleep Mode Available settings range from 1 240 minutes The factory default setting is 30 minutes Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings General Settings Timeouts 3 Inthe Sleep Mode field enter the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Timeouts 2 Touch the arrows next to Sleep Mode to select the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode 3 Touch Submit Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 58 Using Hibernate Mode Hibernate is an ultra low power operating mode When operating in Hibernate mode the printer is essentially off
167. e ai raggi Fase Usynlig laserstri nig n r kassetter tas ut og sperren er satt wt av spill Ueng ekeponering Mebezpeciefmowo mwwvidocz e prormiencownw lasaowe po wyycu kasety ar fwceerru bichedy Undead okapat na wi zk Once Npa cem cap petia W appre doecaiate xe cpevoe Mary Dasepeeoe area MiGente uote Tere Foy Pogor Netegpeterates newtiininato rasho Juranin pri cdolratjch kauwe ch a ofbickceane pointe Newystavigte an D n Pebgro Se prodacen recheciores liner irvtsidies al extraer los cartuctca cos of intertlogqees desactweds fete ia exgce ccn al haz de liner Varning Osynlig laserstr ining n r kassetterna dr borttagna ocs sp rren avaktiverad Uedwk att uts tta dig for str len amp M h yz ten ARANENSE WAR KF ROMMLET MIL SSA SSCLT Fal Power consumption Product power consumption The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product Note Some modes may not apply to your product Description Power consumption Watts Printing The product is generating hard copy output from electronic inputs 1000 W Copy The product is generating hard copy output from hard copy original 1050 W documents Scan The product is scanning hard copy documents 115 W Notices 310 Mode Description Power consumption Watts Ready The product is waiting for a print job 70 W Sleep Mode The product is in a high level energy saving mode 17W Hibernate The product is in a
168. e any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the system board For more information see Accessing the system board on page 20 2 Unpack the ISP and plastic tee Note Avoid touching the components on the card 3 Locate the appropriate connector on the system board 4 Remove the printer hard disk For more information see Removing a printer hard disk on page 36 Additional printer setup 27 5 Remove the metal cover from the ISP opening A 6 Align the posts of the plastic tee to the holes on the system board and press down until the tee clicks into place Be sure each post of the tee has latched completely and the tee is seated firmly on the system board Additional printer setup 28 7 Install the ISP on the plastic tee Angle the ISP over the plastic tee and then slant it toward the plastic tee so that any overhanging connectors will pass through the ISP opening in the system board cage Additional printer setup 29 9 Insert the long thumbscrew and turn it clockwise enough to hold the ISP in place but do not yet tighten the thumbscrew 10 Attach the two provided screws to secure the ISP mounting bracket to
169. e of text graphics and photos e Photo Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image Choose content source from Color Laser Black White Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press or Other Color Laser Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Use when the original document was printed using a black white laser printer Inkjet Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer Scanning to a computer or flash drive 129 Photo Film Use when the original document is a photo from film Magazine Use when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper Use when the original document is from a newspaper Press Use when the original document was printed using a printing press e Other Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Darkness This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document Page Setup This option lets you change the Sides Duplex Orientation and Binding Sides Duplex Use this to specify if the original document is simplex printed on one page or duplex printed on both sides This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e mail Orientation Use this to specify the orientation of the original document and then change Sides and Binding to match the orientation Binding
170. e only new envelopes from undamaged packages To optimize performance and minimize jams do not use envelopes that Have excessive curl or twist Are stuck together or damaged in any way Have windows holes perforations cutouts or embossing Have metal clasps string ties or folding bars Printing 80 Have an interlocking design Have postage stamps attached Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position Have bent corners Have rough cockle or laid finishes Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes Note A combination of high humidity over 6096 and high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes Tips on using labels Print samples on the labels being considered for use before buying large quantities Note Paper labels are supported Other media such as vinyl may show print quality defects in some environments and prolonged vinyl label usage may reduce fuser life For detailed information on label printing characteristics and design see the Card Stock amp Label Guide available on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com When printing on labels e Use labels designed specifically for laser printers Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that Thelabels can withstand temperatures up to 190 C 374 F without sealing excessive curling wrinkling or releasing hazardous emissions Label adhesives f
171. e printer control panel Quality menu CHECK THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM OR APPLICATION The software program or application may have specified an off white background Troubleshooting 299 Toner rubs off ABC DEF These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray CHECK THE PAPER WEIGHT AND PAPER TEXTURE SETTINGS Change the Paper Weight from Normal to Heavy If necessary change the Paper Texture from Normal to Rough in the printer control panel Paper menu THE FUSER IS WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the fuser Toner specks ABC DEF These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following THE TONER CARTRIDGES ARE WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the defective or worn cartridges THERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH Contact Customer Support Troubleshooting 300 Transparency print quality is poor Try one or more of the following CHECK THE TRANSPARENCIES Use only transparencies that meet the printer specifications CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting is set to Transparency 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type setting 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct type setting For Windows users specify the type from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the type from the Print dialog Uneven print density N ABCD
172. e printing and copying waste In addition the company encourages purchasing paper from suppliers who demonstrate their commitment to sustainable forestry practices Lexmark does not endorse specific suppliers although a converter s productlistfor special applications is maintained However the following paper choice guidelines will help alleviate the environmental impact of printing 1 Minimize paper consumption 2 Be selective about the origin of wood fiber Buy from suppliers who carry certifications such as the Forestry Stewardship Council FSC or The Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification PEFC These certifications guarantee that the paper manufacturer uses wood pulp from forestry operators that employ environmentally and socially responsible forest management and restoration practices 3 Choose the most appropriate paper for printing needs normal 75 or 80 g m certified paper lower weight paper or recycled paper Unacceptable paper examples Test results indicate that the following paper types are at risk for use with laser printers Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper also known as carbonless papers Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the paper Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser e Preprinted papers that require a registration the precise location on the page greater than 2 3 mm 0 9 in such as optical character
173. e serial input buffer Auto 3KB to maximum size allowed Disabled Notes Auto is the factory default setting Disabled turns off job buffering Any jobs already buffered on the disk are printed before normal processing is resumed The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1 KB increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and network buffers Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Understanding printer menus 157 Menu item Description Job Buffering Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing off Notes On Auto e Offis the factory default setting The printer does not buffer print jobs on the printer hard disk On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk Auto buffers print jobs only if the printeris busy processing data from another input port e Changingthis setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Protocol Selects the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port DTR Notes DTR DSR XON XOFF DTRisthe factory
174. e the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Security Set Date and Time Faxing 113 3 In the Set Date amp Time field enter the current date and time 4 Click Submit Note It is recommended to use the network time Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Security Set Date and Time 3 Select the Automatically Observe DST checkbox and then enter the DST start and end dates in the Custom Time Zone Setup section 4 Click Submit Sending a fax Sending a fax using the touch screen 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen touch Fax 4 Enter the fax number or a shortcut using the touch screen or keypad To add recipients touch Next Number and then ente
175. eckthat the quality of the original document is satisfactory Resend the fax There may have been a problem with the quality of the telephone line connection ncrease the fax scan resolution if possible REPLACE THE CARTRIDGE When 88 Cartridge low appears or when the prints appear faded replace the cartridge MAKE SURE THE FAX TRANSMISSION SPEED IS NOT SET TOO HIGH Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup 3 Inthe Max Speed box click one of the following 2400 4800 9600 14400 33600 4 Click Submit Solving home screen applications problems Forms are not available or are not working MAKE SURE THE BOOKMARK POINTING TO THE FORM IS IN THE BOOKMARKS ROOT FOLDER Ifthe bookmark pointing to the form was created in a subfolder of the Bookmarks folder then it will not be available under the Forms solution Delete the bookmark and recreate it under the Bookmarks root folder Troubleshooting 281 MAKE SURE THE BOOKMARK IS POINTING TO THE CORRECT LOCATION The printer does not validate bookmarks If the URL or network location that was specified when the bookmark was created is incorrect then the printer will not be able to access the document The applicati
176. ect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it Lift the printer off of the optional drawer and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same time Note Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer Warning Potential Damage Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer warranty Moving the printer to another location The printer and options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer Any cart used to move the options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the options Keep the printer in an upright position Avoid severe jarring movements Shipping the printer When shipping the printer use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit Maintaining the printer 236 Administrative support Finding advanced networking and administrator information This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server For more advanced system support tasks see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD and the Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com Using the Embedded Web Server If the printer is installed on a network then the Embedded Web S
177. ed Texture Specifies the relative texture of the colored paper loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Rough Smooth Light Texture Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Rough Smooth Heavy Texture Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Rough Smooth Rough Cotton Texture Specifies the relative texture of the cotton paper loaded Rough Note Rough is the factory default setting Custom x Texture Specifies the relative texture of the custom paper loaded Normal Notes Rough Smooth Normal is the factory default setting Settings appear only if the custom type is supported Understanding printer menus 139 Paper Weight menu Menu item Description Plain Weight Specifies the relative weight of the plain paper loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Heavy Light Card Stock Weight Specifies the relative weight of the card stock loaded Normal Notes Heavy Light Normal is the factory default setting Settings appear only if card stock is supported Transparency Weight Specifies the relative weight of the transparencies loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Heavy Light Recycled Weight Specifies the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Heavy Light
178. ed Web Server 1 Open a Web browser In the address bar type the network printer IP address Click Configuration Click Color Samples Click Detailed Options to narrow the set to one color range When the Detailed Options page appears select a color conversion table Enter the RGB or CMYK color number O N QAU FP WN Enter an Increment value from 1 255 Note The closer the value is to 1 the narrower the color sample range will appear 9 Click Print to print the detailed Color Samples set Embedded Web Server does not open Try one or more of the following CHECK THE NETWORK CONNECTION Make sure the printer and computer are turned on and connected to the same network CHECK ADDRESS ENTERED INTO THE WEB BROWSER Depending on the network settings you may need to type https instead of http before the printer IP address to access the Embedded Web Server For more information contact your system support person Make sure you have the correct printer IP address Troubleshooting 504 TEMPORARILY DISABLE WEB PROXY SERVERS Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain Web sites including the Embedded Web Server For more information contact your system support person Contacting customer support When you call customer support describe the problem you are experiencing the message on the display and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution You need to know your pri
179. ed electronically you may want to consider one or more of the following actions before disposing of a printer or hard disk Degaussing Flushes the hard drive with a magnetic field that erases stored data Crushing Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable Milling Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits Note While most data can be erased electronically the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to physically destroy each memory device on which data could have been stored Securing the printer hard disk and other installed memory 218 Erasing volatile memory The volatile memory RAM installed on your printer requires a power source to retain information To erase the buffered data simply power down the device Erasing non volatile memory There are several methods available for erasing data stored in non volatile memory depending on the type of memory device installed and the type of data stored by that device For information about how to erase each type of information see the Embedded Web Server Administrator Guide Individual settings You can erase individual printer settings using the printer control panel or the printer Embedded Web Server Device and network settings You can erase device and network settings and restore factory defaults by resetting the NVRAM using the printer Config menu e Security settings You can restore
180. ed paper loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Glossy Texture Normal Rough Smooth Specifies the relative texture of the glossy paper loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Heavy Glossy Texture Normal Rough Smooth Specifies the relative texture of the glossy paper loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Labels Texture Normal Rough Smooth Specifies the relative texture of the labels loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 138 Vinyl Labels Texture Normal Rough Smooth Menu item Description Specifies the relative texture of the vinyl labels loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Bond Texture Rough Smooth Normal Specifies the relative texture of the bond paper loaded Note Rough is the factory default setting Envelope Texture Normal Rough Smooth Specifies the relative texture of the envelopes loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Rough Envelope Texture Rough Specifies the relative texture of the envelopes loaded Note Rough is the factory default setting Letterhead Texture Normal Rough Smooth Specifies the relative texture of the letterhead loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Preprinted Texture Normal Rough Smooth Specifies the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Color
181. edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to E mail Recipient type an e mail address Send as 4 Touch the button that represents the file type you want to send PDF Use this to create a single file with multiple pages viewable with Adobe Reader Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www adobe com e Secure PDF Use this to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access TIFF Use this to create multiple files or a single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server then TIFF saves one page in each file The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG JPEG Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs XPS Use this to create a single XML Paper Specification XPS file with multiple pages viewable using an Internet Explorer hosted viewer and the NET Framework or by downloading a third party standalone viewer 5 Touch E mail It Note If you selected Secure PDF you will be prompted to enter your password twice E mailing 104
182. electrical noise can cause stray characters to print Set this to On to prevent stray characters from printing SMTP Setup menu Menu item Description Primary SMTP Gateway Specifies SMTP server gateway and port information Primary SMTP Gateway Port Note 25 is the default SMTP gateway port Secondary SMTP Gateway Secondary SMTP Gateway Port SMTP Timeout Specifies the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying 5 30 to send an e mail Note 30 seconds is the factory default setting Reply Address Specifies a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e mail sent by the printer Use SSL Sets the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the Disabled SMTP server Negotiate Notes Required Disabled is the factory default setting When the Negotiate setting is used the SMTP server determines if SSL will be used SMTP Server Authentication Specifies the type of user authentication required for scan to e mail No authentication required privileges Login Plain Note No authentication required is the factory default setting CRAM MD5 Digest MD5 NTLM Kerberos 5 Understanding printer menus 159 Menu item Device Initiated E mail None Use Device SMTP Credentials Description Specifies what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP server Some SMTP servers require credentials to send an e mail Notes User Initiated E mail None
183. em Description Shortcut List Prints a report containing information about configured shortcuts Fax Job Log Prints a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes Note This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax Settings menu Fax Call Log Prints a report containing information about the last 100 attempted received and blocked calls Note This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax Settings menu Copy Shortcuts Prints a report containing information about copy shortcuts E mail Shortcuts Prints a report containing information about e mail shortcuts Fax Shortcuts Prints a report containing information about fax shortcuts FTP Shortcuts Prints a report containing information about FTP shortcuts Profiles List Prints a list of profiles stored in the printer Print Fonts Prints a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in the printer Print Directory Printsa list of allthe resources stored onan optional flash memory card or printer hard disk Notes Job Buffer Size must be set to 100 Make sure the optional flash memory or printer hard disk is installed correctly and working Asset Report Prints a report containing asset information including the printer serial number and model name The report contains text and UPC barcodes that can be a scanned into an asset database J Network Ports menu Active NIC menu Ac
184. en e None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout Blue e 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Contrast Specifies the contrast of the output Best for content Note Best for content is the factory default setting 0 5 Mirror Image Creates a mirror image of the original document off Note Off is the factory default setting On Negative Image Creates a negative image of the original document Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Shadow Detail Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image 4to4 Note 0 is the factory default setting ADF Skew Fix Corrects slight skew in the scanned image Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Understanding printer menus 193 Menu item Scan edge to edge Description Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge to edge Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Sharpness Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image 1 5 Note 3 is the factory default setting Temperature Enables the user to specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer 4to4 output than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default Use cc bcc Enables the use of the cc and bcc fields Off Note Off is the factory default setting On FTP Settings menu Format PDF
185. ended reverse engineering reverse assembly or reverse compilation You may not decrypt the Software Program unless necessary for the legitimate Use of the Software Program ADDITIONAL SOFTWARE This License Agreement applies to updates or supplements to the original Software Program provided by Lexmark unless Lexmark provides other terms along with the update or supplement TERM This License Agreement is effective unless terminated or rejected You may reject or terminate this license at any time by destroying all copies of the Software Program together with all modifications documentation and merged portions in any form or as otherwise described herein Lexmark may terminate your license upon notice if you fail to comply with any of the terms of this License Agreement Upon such termination you agree Notices 322 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 to destroy all copies of the Software Program together with all modifications documentation and merged portions in any form TAXES You agree that you are responsible for payment of any taxes including without limitation any goods and services and personal property taxes resulting from this Agreement or your Use of the Software Program LIMITATION ON ACTIONS No action regardless of form arising out of this Agreement may be brought by either party more than two years after the cause of action has arisen except as provided under applicable law APPLICABLE LAW This Agree
186. entage coverage of toner on a page The estimate is printed on a separate page at the end of each print job Note Off is the factory default setting PDF menu Description Scale to Fit No Yes Scales page content to fit the selected paper size Note No is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 211 Menu item Description Annotations Prints annotations in a PDF Do Not Print Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Print PostScript menu Menu item Description Print PS Error Prints a page containing the PostScript error Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Lock PS Startup Mode Enables users to disable the SysStart file Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Font Priority Establishes the font search order Resident Notes Flash Disk Resident is the factory default setting This menu item is available only if a formatted flash memory option card or printer hard disk is installed and operating properly Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not read write write or password protected Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100 Image Smoothing Enhances the contrast and sharpness of low resolution images and smooths Off their color transitions On Notes e Off is the factory default setting Image Smoothing has no effect on images that are 300 dpi or higher in resolution PCL Emul menu Menu item
187. eparated Paper and specialty media guidelines 74 Grain andformation impacts curling which also influences the mechanics of how the paper behaves as it moves through the printer Brightness and texture look and feel Recycled papers are better than ever however the amount of recycled content in a paper affects the degree of control over foreign matter And while recycled papers are one good path to printing in an environmentally responsible manner they are not perfect The energy required to de ink and deal with additives such as colorants and glue often generates more carbon emissions than does normal paper production However using recycled papers enables better resource management overall Lexmark concerns itself with the responsible use of paper in general based on life cycle assessments of its products To gain a better understanding of the impact of printers on the environment the company commissioned a number of life cycle assessments and found that paper was identified as the primary contributor up to 8096 of carbon emissions caused throughout the entire life of a device from design to end of life This is due to the energy intensive manufacturing processes required to make paper Thus Lexmark seeks to educate customers and partners on minimizing the impact of paper Using recycled paper is one way Eliminating excessive and unnecessary paper consumption is another Lexmark is well equipped to help customers minimiz
188. erties For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog Troubleshooting 292 Light colored line white line or incorrectly colored line appears on prints aa fB fB AB Try one or more of the following MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE PRINT CARTRIDGE Replace the defective print cartridge MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER BELT IS NOT DEFECTIVE Replace the defective transfer belt For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part Paper curl Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings 2 Before sending the print job specify the correct paper type setting For Windows users specify the paper type from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the paper type from the Print dialog LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it Print irregularities Troubleshooting 293 Try one or more of the following LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loade
189. erver is available for a range of functions including Viewing a virtual display of the printer control panel Checking the status of the printer supplies Configuring printer settings Configuring network settings Viewing reports To access the Embedded Web Server for your printer 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Notes e f you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and then locate the IP address in the TCP IP section f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Embedded Web Server correctly 2 Press Enter Checking the status of the printer 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Device Status The device status shows the following e Paper tray settings Level of toner in the print cartridge Percentage of life remaining in the maintenance kit Capacity measurements of certain printer parts Administrative support 237 Checking the virtual display 1 Open an Embedded Web Server associated with your printer Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the I
190. ervice does not include repair of failures caused by Modification or unauthorized attachments Accidents misuse abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user s guides manuals instructions or guidance Unsuitable physical or operating environment Notices 519 Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications Refurbishment repair refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products supplies or parts Products supplies parts materials such as toners and inks software or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY ANY WARRANTIES THAT MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD ALL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS PRICES AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE Limitation of liability Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document For any claim concerning performance or non
191. es a single file with multiple pages viewable with Adobe Reader Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www adobe com Secure PDF Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access e TIFF Creates multiple files ora single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server then TIFF saves one page in each file The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG JPEG Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs e XPS Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages viewable using an Internet Explorer hosted viewer and the NET Framework or by downloading a third party standalone viewer Page Setup This option lets you change the Sides Duplex Orientation and Binding Sides Duplex Specifies if the original document is simplex printed on one page or duplex printed on both sides This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e mail Orientation Specifies the orientation ofthe original document and then changes Sides and Binding to match the orientation Binding Specifies if the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge side E mailing 706 Scan Preview This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e mail When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview
192. essary adjust the color alignment again Clipped images Try one or more of the following CHECK THE GUIDES Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded Troubleshooting 290 CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Size setting 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting For Windows users specify the size from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog Fine horizontal lines appear on color pages You may notice fine horizontal lines in photographs or pages with a high concentration of color This can occur when the printer is in Quiet Mode To fix this set Quiet Mode to Off Image Photo Shadow images appear on prints Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings 2 Before sending the print job specify the correct paper type setting For Windows users specify the paper type from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the paper type from the Print dialog MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER When 88 xx color cartridge low appears make sure th
193. est that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved This equipment contains no user serviceable parts For repair and warranty information contact Lexmark International Inc See the previous paragraph for contact information Notices 312 Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for information If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line ensure the installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment consult your telephone company or a qualified installer Telephone companies report that electrical surges typically lightning transients are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources This has been identified as a major nationwide problem It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated and certified by UL Underwriter s Laboratories another NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory or a recognized safety certification body in the country region of use This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 m
194. esult in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line as determined by the total RENs contact your local telephone company For products approved after July 23 2001 the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US AAAEQHITXXXX The digits represented by are the REN without a decimal point for example 03 is a REN of 0 3 For earlier products the REN is shown separately on the label If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required If advance notice is not practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of this equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service If you experience trouble with this equipment for repair or warranty information contact Lexmark International Inc at www lexmark com or your Lexmark representative If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may requ
195. etting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Network Buffer Auto 3KB to maximum size allowed Sets the size of the network input buffer Notes Auto is the factory default setting The value can be changed in 1 KB increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and USB buffers Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Job Buffering Off On Auto Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing This menu only appears if a formatted disk is installed Notes e Off is the factory default setting On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Understanding printer menus 148 Menu item Description Mac Binary PS Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs Auto Notes On Off Auto is the fac
196. exmark Remarketer referred to in this statement as Remarketer Notices 318 Limited warranty Lexmark warrants that this product ls manufactured from new parts or new and serviceable used parts which perform like new parts ls during normal use free from defects in material and workmanship If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair or replacement at Lexmark s option If this product is a feature or option this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product for which it was intended To obtain warranty service you may be required to present the feature or option with the product If you transfer this product to another user warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user for the remainder of the warranty period You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that user Limited warranty service The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end earlier if it or its original contents are substantially used up depleted or consumed Toobtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase You may berequired to deliver your producttotheRemarketer or Lexmark
197. f is the factory default setting On Shadow Detail Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image 4to4 Note 0 is the factory default setting ADF Skew Fix Specifies whether or not to fix slight skew on the scanned image Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Scan edge to edge Off Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge to edge Note Off is the factory default setting On Sharpness Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image 1 5 Note 3 is the factory default setting Temperature Enables the user to specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer Ato4 output than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the i default J Print Settings Copies Specifies a default number of copies for each print job 1 999 Note 1 is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 202 Paper Source Tray x Manual Paper MP Feeder Manual Envelope Sets a default paper source for all print jobs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Color Generates color print jobs output Color Note Color is the factory default setting Black Only Collate Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies On 1 2 1 2 1 2 Off 1 1 1 2 2 2 Note On is the factory default setting Sides Duplex 1 sided 2 sided Specifies whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the page Not
198. f you want to save this group of settings to use again e ClickFinish A dialog box appears with your scan profile information and the status of the received images 2 Scan your original documents a Load all pages in the ADF or on the scanner glass b From the printer control panel navigate to Scan Email Profiles select your scan profile Submit Note Your output file is saved in a directory or launched in the application you specified Understanding scan profile options Original Size This option sets the size of the documents you are going to scan When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes letter and legal size pages Resolution This option adjusts the output quality of your file Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size Color This option enables or disables color for the scanned image Content This option tells the printer the original document type Choose from Text Graphics Text Photo or Photo Choose content type from Text Text Photo Photo or Graphic Text Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphic Use when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations e Text Photo Use when the original document is a mixtur
199. factory defaults or erase security settings by selecting a behavior for the Security Reset Jumper in the Embedded Web Server and then moving a hardware jumper located on the motherboard e Fax data lf your printer does not contain a hard disk or you have chosen NAND for fax storage you can erase fax settings and data by resetting the NVRAM using the printer Config menu Note If your printer has a hard disk that has been partitioned for fax storage you must reformat that partition to erase fax data and settings Embedded solutions You can erase information and settings associated with embedded solutions by uninstalling the solutions or by restoring factory defaults using the printer Config menu Erasing printer hard disk memory Note Not all printers have a hard disk installed Configuring Disk Wiping in the printer menus enables you to remove residual confidential material left by scan print copy and fax jobs by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion Using the Embedded Web Server 1 From the Embedded Web Server click Settings gt Security gt Disk Wiping Note Printers without a hard disk will not display Disk Wiping in the Security menu 2 For Wiping Mode select one of the following Auto Use this to automatically wipe data following each use can increase the time between jobs e Manual Use this to set up a schedule for disk wiping 3 Click Submit 4 From the Security menu click Disk
200. fies the type of paper loaded in each tray Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled Glossy Heavy Glossy Labels Vinyl Labels Bond Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Paper Custom Type x Notes Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1 Custom Type x is the factory default setting for all other trays e favailable a user defined name will appear instead of Custom Type x Use this menu item to configure automatic tray linking MP Feeder Size Specifies the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder Letter Legal Executive Oficio M xico Folio Statement Universal 7 3 4 Envelope 9 Envelope 10 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope B5 Envelope Other Envelope A4 A5 A6 JIS B5 Notes Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting From the Paper menu Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for MP Feeder to appear as a menu item Note Only installed trays are listed in this menu Understanding printer menus 135 Menu item MP Feeder Type Custom Type x Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled Glossy Heavy Glossy Labels Vinyl Labels Bond Envelope Rough Envelope Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Paper Description Specifies the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder Notes Custom Type x is the factory default settin
201. following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the serial port Make sure the Serial Buffer menu is not set to Disabled 56 Standard USB port disabled Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the USB port Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled 56 Standard parallel port disabled Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the parallel port e Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled 56 USB port x disabled Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the USB port Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled 57 Configuration change some held jobs were not restored Something has changed in the printer to invalidate the held jobs Possible changes include The printer firmware has been updated Paper input options needed for the print job were removed The print job was created using data from a device in the USB port and the device is no longer in the USB port The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored while installed in a different printer model Touch Continue to clear the message Troubleshooting 265 58 Too many bins attached 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the
202. ft for accuracy Before printing or making multiple copies of a document Usethe preview feature which you can select from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar to see how the document will look like before you print it Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 56 Avoid paper jams Correctly set the paper type and size to avoid paper jams For more information see Avoiding jams on page 240 Print in black and white To print all text and graphics using only the black print cartridge set the printer to Black Only For more information see Printing in black and white on page 86 Saving energy Using Eco Mode 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Eco Mode gt select a setting gt Submit Choose To Off Use factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco Mode This setting supports the performance specifications of your printer Ener Reduce energy use especially when the printer is idle gy The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity Whenthe p
203. fy and then assign a user name For a confidential print job also enter a four digit PIN 4 Click OK or Print 5 Goto the printer to release the print job From the home screen For confidential print jobs navigate to Held jobs your user name Confidential Jobs your PIN your print job name number of copies Print For other print jobs navigate to Held jobs your user name your print job name number of copies Print Supported flash drives and file types Flash drive File type Lexar JumpDrive 2 0 Pro 256MB 512MB or 1GB sizes Documents SanDisk Cruzer Mini 256MB 512MB or 1GB sizes pdf Notes pex f a d xps Hi Speed USB flash drives must support the Full Speed standard Devices supporting only USB 4 low speed capabilities are not supported er USB flash drives must support the FAT File Allocation Tables system Devices formatted with NTFS ages New Technology File System or any other file system are not supported gif e JPEG jpg e bmp TIFF e tif 2 png A Printing 33 Printing from a flash drive Notes Before printing an encrypted PDF file enter the file password from the printer control panel e You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions 1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port The USB Drive home screen appears Notes f you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention such as when a
204. g From the Paper menu Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for MP Feeder to appear as a menu item Manual Paper Size Letter Legal Executive Oficio M xico Folio Statement Universal A4 A5 A6 JIS B5 Specifies the size of the paper being manually loaded Note Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Note Only installed trays are listed in this menu Understanding printer menus 136 Manual Paper Type Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled Glossy Heavy Glossy Labels Vinyl Labels Bond Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Paper Custom Type x Menu item Description Specifies the type of paper being manually loaded Note Plain Paper is the factory default setting Manual Envelope Size 10 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope B5 Envelope Other Envelope 7 3 4 Envelope 9 Envelope Specifies the size of the envelope being manually loaded Note 10 Envelope is the US factory default setting DL Envelope is the international factory default setting Manual Envelope Type Envelope Rough Envelope Custom Type x Specifies the type of envelope being manually loaded Note Envelope is the factory default setting Note Only installed trays are listed in this menu Configure MP menu Configure MP Cassette Manual First Menu item Description
205. g 99 Advanced Options Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change Paper Saver ADF Skew Fix Advanced Imaging Custom Job Separator Sheets Margin Shift Edge Erase Header Footer Overlay and Advanced Duplex settings Paper Saver This lets you print two or more sheets of an original document together on the same page Paper Saver is also called N up printing The N stands for Number For example 2 up would print two pages of your document on a single page and 4 up would print four pages of your document on a single page Touching Print Page Borders adds or removes the outline border surrounding the original document pages on the output page ADF Skew Fix This lets you correct slight skew in the scanned image Advanced Imaging Use to change or adjust Auto Center Background Removal Color Balance Color Dropout Contrast Mirror Image Negative Image Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail Sharpness and Temperature settings before you copy the document Custom Job This lets you combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job Separator Sheets Useto place a blank piece of paper between copies pages or print jobs The separator sheets can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are printed on Margin Shift This lets you increase the size of the margin a specified distance by shifting the scanned image This can be useful in providing sp
206. g a printing press Other Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer 7 Touch Copy It Collating copies If you print multiple copies of a document then you can choose to print each copy as a set collated or to print the copies as groups of pages not collated Not collated By default Collate is set to On If you do not want to collate your copies then change the setting to Off Collated 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt enter the number of copies gt Collate gt Off gt 4 gt Copy It Placing separator sheets between copies 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy Advanced Options Separator Sheets Note Collate must be set to On for the separator sheets to
207. g material 2 Place the tray near the printer 3 Turn the printer off 4 Align the printer to the tray and then lower the printer into place Note Optional trays lock together when stacked When necessary remove stacked trays one at a time from the top down Standard 550 sheet tray Tray 1 2 Optional 550 sheet trays 5 Turn the printer back on 6 Setthe printer software to recognize the optional input source For more information see Updating available options in the printer driver on page 41 Attaching cables A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Do not use the faxfeature during a lightning storm Do not set up this product ormakeany electrical or cabling connections such as the fax feature power cord ortelephone during a lightning storm Additional printer setup 38 Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or Ethernet cable Be sure to match the following e The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port USB port Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the USB cable any network adapter or the printer in the area shown while actively printing A loss of data or a malfunction can occur 2 Ethernet port Verifying printer setup Once all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on verify that the printer is set up correctly by printing the following Menu settings page
208. g the printer 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 222 Cleaning he Exterior Or tlie DEDEOE cuo ep ER RERGERO HISPAN UNS OR CO n BREATH Ubuntu 222 Cleaning The Scanner Glass sosnedun none End NUN mE as Go on Eu dead o DU 223 Cleaning the ADF Palts ce etapa r i ent ERAN tea I RARO ARD te dd eens 224 Cleaning the printhead ense saos Es DANDI EROR YU ROG GERA UNSER ee eth Re 226 Adj sting scahrierregistratiob see a ENERO A Nea Ba I e Un Rn Nm ung 227 StoringSupDIiBsosnde selon quitas enne pub ap d ANEN PR INDE I BEAD DIE 228 Checking the status OF SHIDDplIGSucesccsic oe ha kr e REIN Tere eet te a ries i plea e nd ient adeo ees eae 228 Ordering SUBDIIBS o eorr ente atate ael NM a a cate ea TN On ae ue 229 Replacing Supplies uc n a NERA RERUM N E SPUR RU INNEN HO nM RR RU 231 Movirigdhie DEDE 3d gare ann EET QD eade en rU NND 235 Administrative support eee esee eee eec ecce eee 237 Finding advanced networking and administrator information eese rettet 237 Using tne Embedded Web SerVel sso emite Enn peso nannies vase nahin 237 Checking tha status OF AIS printe aoo d RON UR RE ERU MUS ba bI tud ce Rh IR FO nMe 237 GCheckirig the virtual displays in a En ratae NOE aela pes eevee dede E 238 Setting up esimall alerts doeet teda iiti b P Edo iP ea eo e as 238 MIEWING 1E POMS iss M E 238 Restoring factory default settiriggs ue ier ERES TI UR NONAS RERO E SUE SEEN AUI
209. g to a DSL service If you subscribe to a DSL service then contact the DSL provider to obtain a DSL filter and telephone cord and then follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the DSL filter Note Your DSL filter may look different than the one in the illustration Faxing 110 3 Connect the DSL filter cable to an active telephone wall jack Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system If you use a PBX or ISDN converter or terminal adapter then follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the port designated for fax and telephone use Notes Make sure the terminal adapter is set to the correct switch type for your region Depending on the ISDN port assignment you may have to connect to a specific port When using a PBX system make sure the call waiting tone is off When using a PBX system dial the outside line prefix before dialing the fax number For more information on using the fax with a PBX system see the documentation that came with your PBX system Faxing 111 Connecting to a distinctive ring service A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone service provider This service allows you to have multiple tele
210. ge came in Lexmark will recycle the box Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling The Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling One hundred percent of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling Boxes used to return the cartridges are also recycled To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and use the prepaid shipping label You can also do the following 1 Visit our Web site at www lexmark com recycle 2 From the Toner Cartridges section select your country or region from the list 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 61 Loading paper and specialty media This section explains how to load the 550 sheet trays the 2 000 sheet tray and the multipurpose feeder It also includes information about paper orientation setting the Paper Size and Paper Type and linking and unlinking trays Setting the paper size and type The Paper Size setting is automatically sensed according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the multipurpose feeder The Paper Size setting for the multipurpose feeder must be set manually from the Paper Size menu The Paper Type setting must
211. h a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting The FTP screen appears with your new setting displayed When Original Size is set to Mixed Letter Legal you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes When Original Size is set to Auto Size Sense the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document Send As This option sets the output PDF TIFF JPEG or XPS for the scanned image PDF Creates a single file with multiple pages viewable with Adobe Reader Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www adobe com Secure PDF Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access e TIFF Creates multiple files ora single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server then TIFF saves one page in each file The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG JPEG Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs XPS Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages viewable using an Internet Explorer hosted viewer and the NET Framework or by downloading a third party standalone viewer Scanning to an FTP address 124 Color This option enables or disables color for the scanned image Resolution This option adjusts the output quality of your file Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time
212. hat support Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for your country orregion can befound onthe Support Web site or on the printed warranty that came with your Telephone support printer E mail support Record the following information located on the store receipt and at the back of the printer and have it ready when you contact support so they may serve you faster Machine Type number Serial number Date purchased Store where purchased Warranty information Warranty information varies by country or region n the US See the Statement of Limited Warranty included with this printer or at http support lexmark com In other countries and regions See the printed warranty that came with your printer Printer configurations A CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high capacity input tray a duplex unit and an input option or more than one input option If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters Learning about the printer 10 You can configure your basic printer by adding optional trays 1 Automatic Document Feeder ADF i 2 _ ADF input tray 3 Printer control panel 4 Standard exit b
213. he Embedded Web Server View Address Shows the assigned AppleTalk address Note The address can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Set Zone Provides a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network default Note When default is selected the printer uses the AppleTalk zone that the list of zones available on the router identifies as the default zone for the network If no default zone exists network then the zone marked with an is the default setting Standard USB menu PCL SmartSwitch Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received On through a USB port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes Onis the factory default setting When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to Off PS SmartSwitch Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received On through a USB port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes Onis the factory default setting When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off NPA Mode Sets the printer to perform
214. he cable attached to the printer hard disk To unplug the cable squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before pulling the cable out 3 Remove the screws while holding the printer hard disk in place and then remove the printer hard disk Additional printer setup 36 4 Setthe printer hard disk aside 5 Reattach the system board cover Order of installation A CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high capacity input tray a duplex unit and an input option or more than one input option If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely Install the printer and any options you have purchased in the following order Caster base
215. he following Touch Continue to clear the message Complete the Analog Fax Setup If the message appears again contact your system support person Fax Station Number not set up The Fax Station Number has not been entered Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message Complete the Analog Fax Setup If the message appears again contact your system support person Install bin x Try one or more of the following Install the specified bin 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Install the specified bin 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Cancel the print job Install Tray x Try one or more of the following Install the specified tray 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Install the specified tray 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Cancel the print job Insert the hole punch box Insert the hole punch box into the finisher and then touch Continue to clear the message Troubleshooting 257 Insert Tray x Insert the specified tray into the printer Insert staple cartridge Try one or more of the following Insert a staple cartridge Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the staple fini
216. he jammed paper and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Closethe paper transport unit door 4 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared Clearing jams 248 431 438 paper jams 1 Push down the button to slide the output finisher to the right 2 Open the finisher door and then removed the jammed paper Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Close the finisher door 4 Slidethe finisher back until it clicks in place 5 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared 455 staple jam 1 Press the latch to open the stapler door Note The stapler door is located behind the finisher Clearing jams 249 2 Lower the latch of the staple cartridge holder and then pull the staple cartridge holder out of the printer Clearing jams 250 4 Close the staple guard 5 Press down on the staple guard until it clicks into place 6 Push the staple cartridge holder firmly back into the stapler unit until the staple cartridge holder clicks into place 7 Close the stapler door 8 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared Clearing jams 251 Troubleshooting The indicator light is blinking The indicator light blinks red until you set up fax and e mail To disable the blinking light follow these steps Note Before completing these instructions for a printer on a network make sure the fax cables are connected
217. he waste toner bottle into the printer 82 xx Waste toner bottle nearly full Order a replacement waste toner bottle immediately 1 Replace the waste toner bottle For instructions on installing the waste toner bottle from the printer control panel touch More Information 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 83 xx Replace transfer module Replace the transfer module following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 83 xx Transfer module life warning 1 Replace the transfer module following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 83 xx Transfer module missing Insert the transfer module into the printer 88 xx color cartridge nearly low Order a replacement for the specified print cartridge 88 xx color cartridge low 1 Remove the specified cartridge Warning Potential Damage Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs 2 Firmly shake the cartridge side to side and front to back several times to redistribute the toner 3 Reinsert the cartridge and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Troubleshooting 268 Notes Repeat this procedure multiple times until the print remains faded When the print remains faded replace the cartridge Havea new cartridge available when the current one no longe
218. hed to the printer hard disk mounting bracket and then remove the bracket Additional printer setup 32 C Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the ISP and then press down on the printer hard disk until the standoffs are in place d Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP Note The plugs and receptacles are color coded Additional printer setup 33 To install a printer hard disk directly on the system board a Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the system board and then press down on the printer hard disk until the standoffs are in place b Usethe two provided screws to attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the system board Note The plugs and receptacles are color coded Additional printer setup 34 4 Reattach the system board cover Additional printer setup 55 Removing a printer hard disk Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors 1 Accessthe system board For more information see Accessing the system board on page 20 2 Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the system board leaving t
219. her drawers or trays closed until needed SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Safety information 8 Learning about the printer Thank you for choosing this printer We ve worked hard to make sure it will meet your needs To start using your new printer right away use the setup materials that came with the printer and then skim the User s Guide to learn how to perform basic tasks To get the most out of your printer read the User s Guide carefully and make sure you check the latest updates on our Web site We re committed to delivering performance and value with our printers and we want to make sure you re satisfied If you do encounter any problems along the way one of our knowledgeable support representatives will be delighted to help you get back on track fast And if you find something we could do better please let us know After all you are the reason we do what we do and your suggestions help us do it better Finding information about the printer What are you looking for Find it here Initial setup instructions Setup documentation The setup documentation Connecting the printer came with the printer and is also available on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com Installing the printer software Additional setup and instructions for using the printer User s Guide The User s Guide is available on the Selecting and storing paper and specialty media Software and Documentation CD Loading paper For upda
220. his option tells the printer the original document type and source Choose content type from Text Text Photo Photo or Graphic Text Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphic Use when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations e Text Photo Use when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Photo Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image Choose content source from Color Laser Black White Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press or Other Color Laser Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Use when the original document was printed using a black white laser printer Inkjet Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer Photo Film Use when the original document is a photo from film Magazine Use when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper Use when the original document is from a newspaper Press Use when the original document was printed using a printing press Other Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Darkness This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document Send As This option sets the output PDF TIFF JPEG or XPS for the scanned image PDF Creat
221. hoto from film Magazine is used when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper is used when the original document is from a newspaper Press is used when the original document was printed using a printing press Other is used when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Color Specifies whether a job prints in grayscale or color Color Note Color is the factory default setting Gray Resolution Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned 150 Note 150 dpi is the factory default setting 200 300 400 600 75 Darkness Lightens or darkens the output 1 9 Note 5 is the factory default setting Orientation Specifies the orientation of the scanned image Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Understanding printer menus 195 Menu item Original Size Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Universal 4x6in 3xbin Business Card Custom Scan Size x A4 Description Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned Notes e A4is the international factory default setting Letter is the US factory default setting A5 Oficio Mexico A6 JIS B4 JIS B5 Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes Sides Duplex Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page off Notes Long edge Short edge Offisthe factory default setting Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and t
222. i b a od RUE 270 Solving copy proDlelms a aosnieteatetudee ve tocco e e e Rte adir late f frd dE ee veo ROW E Qt a Pete tsp 273 Solving Scanner problems s spas NRI DENKE de nme academe peu M RS ERRARE EA CHA HUNC 276 solvirig Taxsproblelis opooad o a Sod ONE dd eR bM Nd REIN EU 278 Solving home screen applications PrObleMs ccssccssssecsesseccsscssccsssssessecssessccseessecsecsecssccseeeseesecsecessessecseesseeseeses 281 Solvinig option problems tonio ad n Wade p n aal Taran ed ada Vd dad edo die 284 Solving paper feed preblenmiss siib tert Dd qu ANM eA dU RU ee oe RR T 287 Solving print quality PRO TINS rcs asec o eee Om R nd v delatis 288 solving color quality DFODIGIDS 4 opti oet et EA ameta Rania n a Mo p orat n I fRdud 301 Embedded Web Serverdoes nob Opens suites t ani UN Ene pet EUR eu pus 304 Contacting customer SUPPO taseeseen ienee eee e i d ae eap Qu adn oa een Cusen be E asi 305 OCLC SS ss tans RR 306 Product IBFOTtmatiobi s soi a me ERO na e inen dina uu End EDITED ED UNE 306 ECVE VOT NOTCE Sasinai co eet AR E tud tipi aic c E ba oa t e Ue P Aa US cde 306 Power CONSUMPTION Re M M 310 MAE PER NE EP AEE rn OP RO nner a No AR PET ere EM ee eee era ONT PE 325 Contents 6 Safety information Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY This
223. i ciel sued dee 83 Printing from a fIasbid E VO uec eno terit teres et veter e esi eee oec Le etit OTI 84 Printing information Dalee pa e pU OIM eu t NW WO E E ER UAR QUI Sbd REPAS 85 Printing iriblack and whites etae Re ka Ee o Ree OM in NM dun MI uds 86 Bdjustirig tongrdarkHess oso aad n RN E ume Mn Dod OH a odi Eu 86 Su upported finishing eiue scs ch aei dada nae i Ro e etd etapa A RS 86 GancelingaipribJoD cenae adeo vm frd eV beer xad hereto vse RR alee Od te pe forty 88 gelo 3 NeDRDEM EET TREE 90 Making CODIGOS accu dn eio n dft d en tat a fau o Qd vcf etuer A eei efe nt 90 Copying film pbotoss e eene piod a e aR doa ene dU Ead Vade ded 91 Copying orn specialty teda eid t agen pte A EE al ae C at 91 Custorntzilig copy Setups ee eibi arte ei fudit o fad Hat asst ien iue bre ie eost 92 Placing information Ort coles ceo eere REMO ER EREN IRA NRI bul Dada eoi Er medie 97 Cancelinga copy JOD apap e erobern RE e ORDEI CRI ae ei daB 97 Understanding the copy screens and OPtiOns cscssscssecsesssecssscssssssssecssesscssscssessscssccssccssssussucsseccssesceaecesecsscsseesees 98 Icd L8 Ez ao RR PERDER RO RERO NE REINO ee 101 Gettibg ready COS AIL 5 oret tedesco eleven eer ea ue ae tes a eed laren sua ates 101 Creating ariemall shortcuts ode idera HP IRR REIR RR ROANOKE NARRA Rn prd YR 102 Emailing document anoo BRUN BIA M ORB dian Oise 103 Contents 3 Customizing e mail settiligS eue es ties e eiut ter HORE NE ERE R RE ASH NIRT
224. ick Utilities Print Center or Printer Setup Utility Double click the printer icon From the printer window select the print job you want to cancel Uu A W N From the icon bar at the top of the window click the Delete icon Printing 89 Copying ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings Making copies Making a quick copy 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the printer control panel touch Copy It Copying using the ADF 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Adjustthe paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy change the copy settings Copy It Copying 90 Copying using the scanner glass 1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner 2
225. ictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada To prevent radio interference to the licensed service this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding Equipment or its transmit antenna that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population consult Safety Code 6 obtainable from Health Canada s Web site www hc sc gc ca rpb The term IC before the certification registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met Industry Canada Canada Cetappareil est conforme la norme RSS 210 d Industry Canada Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes 1 cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d interf rences et 2 il doit accepter toute interf rence recue y compris celles risquant d alt rer son fonctionnement Cet appareil a t concu pour fonctionner uniquement avec l antenne fournie L utilisation de toute autre antenne est strictement interdite par la r glementation d Industry Canada En application des r glementations d Industry Canada l utilisation d une antenne de gain sup rieur est strictement interdite Pour emp cher toute interf rence radio au service faisant l objet d une licence cet appareil doit tre utilis l int rieur e
226. ield of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Reports and then click the type of report you want to view Administrative support 238 Restoring factory default settings If you want to retain a list of the current menu settings for reference then print a menu settings page before restoring the factory default settings Warning Potential Damage Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default settings Exceptions include the display language custom sizes and messages and network port menu settings All downloads stored in RAM are deleted Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Factory Defaults gt Restore Now gt Submit Administrative support 239 Clearing jams By carefully selecting paper and loading it properly you can avoid most jams If jams do occur follow the steps outlined in this section To clear a jam message and resume printing clear the entire paper path and then touch Continue jam cleared If Jam Recovery is set to On then the printer prints a new copy ofthe page that jammed If Jam Recovery is set to Auto
227. image appears Advanced Options Touching this button opens a screen where you can change ADF Skew Fix Advanced Imaging Custom Job Edge Erase and Transmission Log settings ADF Skew Fix This lets you correct slight skew in the scanned image Advanced Imaging This lets you adjust the Background Removal Color Balance Color Dropout Contrast JPEG Quality Mirror Image Negative Image Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail Sharpness and Temperature settings before you e mail the document Custom Job This lets you combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job Edge Erase This lets you eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan Transmission Log This lets you print the transmission log or transmission error log E mailing 107 Faxing Note Fax capabilities may not be available on all printer models ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings Getting the printer ready to fax The following connection methods may not be applicable in all countries or regions Note During the initial printer setup
228. imal printing performance Residue on the ADF parts may cause print quality issues and false 280 299 paper jam messages 1 Turn the printer off 2 Slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth with water 3 Open the ADF cover Maintaining the printer 224 4 Remove the pick roller assembly 5 Wipe the surface of both pick rollers 6 Replace the pick roller assembly 7 Wipe the entire surface under the ADF cover 8 Close the ADF cover Maintaining the printer 225 Cleaning the printhead lenses Clean the printhead lenses when you encounter print quality problems 1 Open the front door 2 Remove all print cartridges Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the shiny area on the photoconductor drum Doing so can damage the photoconductor 3 Locate the four printhead lenses 4 Clean the lenses using compressed air Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the printhead lenses 5 Reinstall the print cartridges Maintaining the printer 226 6 Close the front door Adjusting scanner registration Scanner Registration lets you align the scan area with the paper location 1 Turn the printer off 2 Clean the scanner glass and backing material For more information see Cleaning the scanner glass on page 223 3 Hold down BA and B while turning the printer on 4 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration
229. in 5 Front door 6 Standard 550 sheet trays Tray 1 7 Multipurpose feeder 8 Side door 9 Jam access doors 10 Optional 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder 11 Optional 550 sheet trays 12 Caster base Basic functions of the scanner The scanner provides copy fax and scan to network capability for large workgroups You can Make quick copies or change the settings on the printer control panel to perform specific copy jobs Send a fax using the printer control panel e Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time Scan documents and send them to your computer an e mail address a flash drive or an FTP destination Scan documents and send them to another printer PDF by way of FTP Learning about the printer 11 Understanding the ADF and scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple pages including duplex pages Use the scanner glass for single pages or book pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings or lightweight carbonless forms Using the ADF oad the document into the ADF faceup short edge first Load up to 75 sheets of plain paper in the ADF input tray e Scan sizes from 76 x 139 mm 3 0 x 5 5 in to 215 x 355 mm 8 5 x 14 in Scan documents with mixed page sizes letter and legal Scan media weights from 52 to 120 g m 14 to 32 Ib Donotload postcards photos small items transpa
230. ing screens appear Fax Name or Station Name Fax Number or Station Number 1 When Fax Nameor Station Name appears enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes 2 After entering the Fax Name or Station Name touch Submit 3 When Fax Number or Station Number appears enter the printer fax number 4 After entering the Fax Number or Station Number touch Submit Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup 3 Inthe Fax Name or Station Name field enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes 4 In the Fax Number or Station Number field enter the printer fax number 5 Click Submit Choosing a fax connection You can connect the printer with equipment such as a telephone an answering machine or a computer modem To determine the best way to set up the printer see the following table Faxing 109 Notes The printer is an analog device that works best when directly connected to the wall outlet Other equipment suchasatelephone or answering machine can be successfully attached to pass through the printer as described in the se
231. ing supplies 56 Hibernate Mode 59 Quiet Mode 57 Sleep Mode 58 standard exit bin lighting 60 erasing hard disk memory 219 erasing non volatile memory 219 erasing volatile memory 219 Ethernet networking Macintosh 47 Windows 47 Ethernet port 38 exit bins linking 72 exporting a configuration using the Embedded Web Server 55 exporting a configuration using the Embedded Web Server 55 exterior of the printer cleaning 222 e mail canceling 105 disabling 252 enabling 252 e mail alerts low supply levels 238 paper jam 238 setting up 238 e mail function setting up 101 e mail screen advanced options 106 107 options 105 106 107 E mail Settings menu 189 Index 327 e mail shortcuts creating using the Embedded Web Server 102 e mail sending using a shortcut number 103 e mailing adding message line 104 adding subject line 104 changing output file type 104 configuring e mail settings 101 creating shortcuts using the Embedded Web Server 102 creating shortcuts using the touch screen 102 setting up e mail function 101 using a shortcut number 103 using the address book 103 using the touch screen 103 F factory defaults restoring 239 FAQ about color printing 301 fax disabling 252 document type settings 118 enabling 252 fax connection connecting the printer to the wall jack 110 connecting to a DSL line 110 connecting to a PBX or ISDN 111 fax connections regional adapters 112 fax log viewing 117 Fax Mode Analog Fax Setu
232. inimizes the power used by the printer Performance may be affected but print quality is not Energy Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and specialty media Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media needed for a print job Performance may be affected but print quality is not ADF Loaded Beep Specifies whether the ADF emits a beep when paper is loaded Enabled Note Enabled is the factory default setting Disabled Understanding printer menus 165 Menu item Quiet Mode Off On Run Initial setup Yes Description Reduces the amount of noise produced by the printer Notes Offis the factory default setting This setting supports the performance specifications for your printer Onconfiguresthe printerto produceas little noise as possible This setting is best suited for printing text and line graphics Foroptimal printing of color rich documents set Quiet Mode to Off Selecting Photo from the driver may disable Quiet Mode and provide better print quality and full speed printing Instructs the printer to run the setup wizard Notes No Yesis the factory default setting After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the Country select screen the default becomes No Keyboard Specifies a language and custom key information for the printer Keyboard Type control panel keyboard The additional tabs enable access to English accent marks and symbols from the printer co
233. int cartridge Print is too light Try one or more of the following LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE The paper may have absorbed moisture from high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it AvoID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type setting e For Windows users check this setting from Print Properties e For Macintosh users check this setting from the Print dialog MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER When 88 xx color cartridge low appears make sure the toner is distributed evenly within the print cartridge 1 Remove the print cartridge Warning Potential Damage Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs 2 Firmly shake the cartridge side to side and front to back several times to redistribute the toner Troubleshooting 295 3 Reinsert the print cartridge Note If print quality does not improve then replace the print cartridge If the problem continues then the printer may need to be serviced For more information contact customer support MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE PRINT CARTRIDGE Replace the defective print cartridge Repeating defects appear on prints Try one or more of the following REPLACE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE
234. inter configurations on computers that access the printer must be updated since the printer will be assigned a new IP address All computers that access the printer must be updated with this new IP address Notes e Ifthe printer has a static IP address then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations e f the computers are configured to use network name that will stay the same instead of by IP address then you do not need to make any changes to your computer configurations f you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for a wired connection then make sure the wired network is disconnected when you configure the printer to operate wirelessly If the wired connection remains connected then the wireless configuration will complete but the wireless ISP will not be active In the event that the printer was configured for a wireless ISP while still attached to a wired connection disconnect the wired connection turn the printer off and then turn the printer back on again This will enable the wireless ISP Only one network connection at a time is active If you want to switch the connection type between wired and wireless you must first turn the printer off connect the cable to switch to a wired connection or disconnect the cable to switch to a wireless connection and then turn the printer on For Windows users 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser
235. inting Install a different printer hard disk before performing any operations that require a printer hard disk 62 Disk full Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing Delete fonts macros and other data stored on the printer hard disk Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity 80 xx Fuser near life warning 1 Order a replacement fuser immediately 2 When print quality is reduced install the new fuser following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 3 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 80 xx Fuser life warning Order a replacement fuser immediately When print quality is reduced install the new fuser following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 80 xx Replace fuser Replace the fuser using the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 80 xx Fuser missing 1 Replace the fuser following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Troubleshooting 267 82 xx Replace waste toner bottle 1 Replace the waste toner bottle For instructions on replacing the waste toner bottle from the printer control panel touch More Information 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 82 xx Waste toner bottle missing Reinsert t
236. ion under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings Fax Settings Analog Fax Setup Holding Faxes 3 Inthe Print Faxes Password field enter a password 4 From the Held Fax Mode menu select one of the following Off AlwaysOn Manual Scheduled 5 f you selected Scheduled then continue with the following steps a Click Fax Holding Schedule b From the Action menu select Hold faxes Faxing 120 c From the Time menu select the time you want the held faxes released d From the Day s menu select the day you want the held faxes released 6 Click Add Forwarding a fax This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number e mail address FTP site or LDSS 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Click Settings gt Fax Settings From the Fax Forwarding menu select one of the following Print Print and Forward Forward From the Forward to menu select one of the following Fax E mail e FTP LDSS eSF In the Forward to Shortcut field enter the shortcut number where you want the fax
237. ional Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hung ria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information Regulatory notices for wireless products This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters for example but not limited to wireless network cards or proximity card readers Exposure to radio frequency radiation The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory agencies A minimum separation of 20 cm 8 inches must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies Notices 315 Industry Canada Canada This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS 210 Operation is subjecttothefollowing two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided Use of any other antenna is str
238. iption Color Specifies whether or not a job prints in grayscale or color Color Note Color is the factory default setting Gray Resolution Specifies the resolution of the scan in dots per inch 150 Note 150 is the factory default setting 200 300 400 600 75 Darkness Lightens or darkens the output 1 9 Note 5 is the factory default setting Orientation Specifies the orientation of the scanned image Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Original Size Specifies the paper size of the document being scanned Letter Notes Legal Exec tive A4isthe international factory default setting Folio Letter is the US factory default setting Statement Universal 4x6 in 3x5in Business Card Custom Scan Size x A4 A5 Oficio Mexico A6 JIS B4 JIS B5 Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes Sides Duplex Off Long edge Short edge Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page Notes Offis the factory default setting Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape Understanding printer menus 191 Menu item Description JPEG Quality Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the image Best for Content Notes 5 90 Best for content is
239. is activated on your printer In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later 1 From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences gt Print amp Fax 2 Click and then navigate to AppleTalk select the printer from the list Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier 1 From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Utilities Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center From the Printer List click Add Click Default Browser tab More Printers From the first pop up menu select AppleTalk Uu RUN Additional printer setup 46 6 From the second pop up menu select Local AppleTalk Zone 7 Select the printer from the list and then click Add Installing the printer on a wired network These instructions apply to Ethernet and fiber optic network connections Note Make sure you have completed the initial setup of the printer For Windows users 1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD Wait for the Welcome screen to appear If the CD does not launch after a minute then do the following a Click or click Start and then click Run b In the Start Search or Run box type D setup exe where Dis the letter of your CD or DVD drive C Press Enter or click OK 2 Click Install and then follow the instructions on the computer screen Note To configure the printer using a static IP address using IPv6 or to configure printers using scripts select Administrator Tools Select Ethernet connection and then click Conti
240. is the factory default setting Asetting value of 0 disables the timeout e fa value of 1 9 is selected then the setting is saved as 10 Banner Page Allows the printer to print a banner page Off Note Off is the factory default setting On TCP IP menu This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network x gt Standard Network Setup or Network x Setup gt TCP IP Note This menu is available only in network models or printers attached to print servers Menu item Description Activate Activates TCP IP On Note On is the factory default setting Off Set Hostname Lets you set the current TCP IP hostname Note This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server IP Address Lets you view or change the current TCP IP address Note Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP settings to Off It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that support BOOTP and RARP Netmask Lets you view or change the current TCP IP netmask Gateway Lets you view or change the current TCP IP gateway Enable DHCP Specifies the DHCP address and parameter assignment setting On Note On is the factory default setting Off Enable RARP Specifies the RARP address assignment setting On Note On is the factory default setting Off Enable BOOTP Specifies the BOOTP address assignment setting On Note On is the
241. jam has occurred then the printer ignores the flash drive f you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs then Busy appears After these print jobs are processed you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive Printing 84 Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the USB cable any network adapter any connector the memory device or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing reading or writing from the memory device A loss of data can occur 2 From the printer control panel touch Print from USB and then select the document you want to print 3 Touch the arrows to increase the number of copies to print and then touch Print Notes Do notremove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing e Ifyou leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen then you can still print files from the flash drive as held jobs Printing information pages Printing a font sample list 1 From the home screen navigate to Reports Print Fonts 2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts Printing a directory list A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or on the printer hard disk From the home screen navigate to Printing 85 gt Reports gt Print Directory Printing print quality test pages Print the print quality test pages to isolate print quality problems 1
242. jects However Color Correction must be set to Manual or no user defined color conversion will be implemented Manual color correction settings are specific to the type of object being printed text graphics or images and how the color of the object is specified in the software program RGB or CMYK combinations Troubleshooting 502 Notes Manual color correction is not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK combinations It is also not effective in situations in which the software program or the computer operating system controls the adjustment of colors e The color conversion tables applied to each object when Color Correction is set to Auto generate preferred colors for the majority of documents To manually apply a different color conversion table 1 From the Quality menu select Color Correction and then select Manual 2 From the Quality menu select Manual Color and then select the appropriate color conversion table for the affected object type Manual Color menu Object type Color conversion tables RGB Image Vivid Produces brighter more saturated colors and may be applied RGB Text to all incoming color formats RGB Graphics sRGB Display Produces an output that approximates the colors displayed on a computer monitor Black toner usage is optimized for printing photographs Display True Black Produces an output that approximates the colors displayed on a computer moni
243. l Envelopes X X X J X This media is not supported by the duplexer Do not use inkjet or 3M CG3710 transparencies 3 Paper labels are supported Other media such as vinyl may show print quality defects in some environments and prolonged vinyl label usage may reduce fuser life For more information see the Card Stock amp Label Guide available on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com Use envelopes that lie flat when individually placed facedown on a table Paper and specialty media guidelines 78 Printing This chapter covers printing printer reports and job cancelation The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print For more information see Avoiding jams on page 240 and Storing paper on page 76 Printing a document Printing a document 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu set the Paper Type and Paper Size to match the loaded paper 2 Send the print job For Windows users a With a document open click File Print b Click Properties Preferences Options or Setup c Adjust settings as necessary d Click OK Print For Macintosh users a Customize the settings as needed in the Page Setup dialog 1 With a document open choose File Page Setup 2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the loaded paper 3 Click OK b Customize the settings as needed in the Print dialog 1 With a document
244. left corner Troubleshooting 275 CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting For Windows users specify the size from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog Solving scanner problems Checking an unresponsive scanner If your scanner is not responding then make sure The printer is turned on The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer print server option or other network device The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors uninterrupted power supplies or extension cords Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working Once you have checked each of these possibilities turn the printer off and then back on This often fixes the problem with the scanner Scan was not successful These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer AN ERROR MAY HAVE OCCURRED IN THE PROGRAM Turn off and then restart the computer Scanning
245. ll 263 39 Complex page some data may not have printed 263 40 color invalid refill change cartridge 263 400 403 paper jams 248 431 438 paper jams 249 455 staple jam 249 460 461 paper jams 248 51 Defective flash detected 263 52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 264 54 Network x software error 264 54 Serial option x error 264 54 Standard network software error 264 55 Unsupported option in slot x 264 550 sheet tray installing 37 550 sheet tray standard or optional loading 63 56 Parallel port x disabled 265 56 Serial port x disabled 265 56 Standard parallel port disabled 265 56 Standard USB port disabled 265 56 USB port x disabled 265 57 Configuration change some held jobs were not restored 265 58 Input config error 266 58 Too many bins attached 266 58 Too many disks installed 266 58 Too many flash options installed 266 58 Too many trays attached 266 59 Incompatible output bin x 267 61 Remove defective disk 267 62 Disk full 267 80 xx Fuser life warning 267 80 xx Fuser missing 267 80 xx Fuser near life warning 267 80 xx Replace fuser 267 82 xx Replace waste toner bottle 268 82 xx Waste toner bottle missing 268 82 xx Waste toner bottle nearly full 268 83 xx Replace transfer module 268 83 xx Transfer module life warning 268 83 xx Transfer module missing 268 840 01 Scanner disabled by admin 269 840 02 Scanner disabled Contact system administrator if problem persists 26
246. ll cannot isolate the problem then contact customer support for additional help Troubleshooting 282 A network destination stopped working or is invalid MAKE SURE THE PRINTER AUTHENTICATION IS CONFIGURED If the application is configured to use MFP authentication credentials then the printer authentication settings must be configured from the Embedded Web Server For more information on configuring the printer authentication settings see the Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide available on www lexmark com MAKE SURE DESTINATION HAS A VALID NETWORK ADDRESS If the destination has been moved then the network address may have changed The destination network address can be accessed from the Embedded Web Server For information on accessing or editing a destination see Editing a destination MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS CONNECTED TO THE NETWORK Make sure that all appropriate network cables are securely connected and that the network settings of the printer are correctly configured For information on networking the printer see the printer User s Guide or the Software and Documentation CD that came with the printer CHECK THE SYSTEM LOG FOR RELEVANT DETAILS 1 Type the printer IP address or hostname in the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the
247. lling optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the system board 1 Accessthe system board For more information see Accessing the system board on page 20 Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver 2 Unpack the memory card Note Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card Additional printer setup 23 3 On the system board open the memory card connector latches Cx ees L2 nes Additional printer setup 24 5 Push the memory card straight into the connector until it clicks into place 6 Reattach the system board cover Installing a flash memory or firmware card The system board has two connections for an optional flash memory or firmware card Only one of each may be installed but the connectors are interchangeable CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the prin
248. ly full appears order a replacement waste toner bottle When 82 Replace waste toner bottle appears replace the waste toner bottle Note Waste toner bottle reuse is not recommended Part name Part number 792X776 Ordering staple cartridges When Staples Lowor Staples Empty appears order the specified staple cartridge For more information see the illustrations inside the stapler door Part name Part number Staple Cartridges 3 pack 25A0013 Since a pack contains 5 000 staples a 3 pack contains 15 000 staples Ordering ADF replacement parts Order ADF replacement parts if you experience problems with paper double feeding or failing to feed through the ADF Part number ADF pick assembly 40X4540 Separator roll 40X4605 Maintaining the printer 230 Ordering a cleaning kit Use the wet and dry wipes from the cleaning kit to clean the touch screen Part name Part number Cleaning kit wet and dry wipes 40X0392 Replacing supplies Replacing a print cartridge 1 Open the front door Maintaining the printer 231 3 Place the old cartridge in the replacement cartridge shipping box and then attach the return label to the box for shipping 4 Unpack a new print cartridge Warning Potential Damage Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs Maintaining the printer 232 5 Shake the new cartridge front to b
249. m MU cutdi ebd dpa ba Pena at Rab tese 56 prxter 57 FR CUMIN E MERE 60 Contents 2 Loading paper and specialty media 62 Settibig thie paper SIZE AIG typos opa io eoi C d a e ERU Peel e pote d d RR 62 Configuring Universal paper setti subo t Mei eta atn e od cin ut o bn Uber ER e EIUS 62 Loading the standard or optional 550 sheet tray sssscssccsscsssecssscsccnsscsscsssscsseesscenscessecsseesecssceeseesseeneeesseenseeses 63 Loading the 2000 sheet high capacity fECCEM ccsessesssecssesssssssssessssecssecssesscssesssccsscssccassssssessscsssecsscsecesssssesueesees 66 Loading the multipurpose feeuer ss usse enttt ay SUE UO p DAP RE UPON de Np atia E MP 68 Linking and unlinkikig trayss ivo n RR Mer sepe o d penitius io uam Opa Ne a bo ERRORS 71 Paper and specialty media guidelines 73 Paper guideline Susini deti mat afe o YR onan ae rriv UR abr paa a AG 73 Supported paper sizes types and weights 5 2 9 In eite a tree ert ere pesa repe a dede bae to 76 PPIBUIDIO oen ccu tuse S LEPIDE MR 79 PrNting a d OCUMENT oe ase edo qui dte me RUD AREAS QNIDAM Dead MOOR ad 79 PRINTING ON specialty media cn otn is oq E dae ect i ap iate Ua WA Er a RAE ARR DRIN eR 79 Printing confidential and other held JOD RN Ida b be addidi 82 Supported flash drives and file types iei Seb tenebo Ed n ie
250. m a computer 278 partial document or photo scans 277 scan was not successful 276 scanner unit does not close 274 scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 276 ScanBack Utility using 128 scanner Automatic Document Feeder ADF 12 functions 11 registration 227 scanner glass 12 Scanner automatic feeder cover open 261 scanner glass cleaning 223 scanner glass flatbed copying using 91 scanning from a flash drive 128 to a computer 127 to an FTP address 122 to an FTP using address book 123 scanning documents at the printer 54 scanning to a computer 127 scanning to a flash drive 128 scanning to an FTP address creating shortcuts using the computer 123 using shortcut numbers 122 using the address book 123 using the touch screen 122 scanning to computer document type setting 129 Security Audit Log menu 163 security lock 13 sending a fax using the touch screen 114 sending fax at a scheduled time 117 separator roll ordering 230 Serial x menu 157 serial printing setting up 50 Set Date and Time menu 164 setting TCP IP address 150 setting the fax number or station number 113 setting the outgoing fax name or station name 113 setting the paper size 62 setting the paper type 62 setting the Universal paper size 62 setting up e mail alerts using the Embedded Web Server 238 setting up serial printing 50 setting up the printer on a wired network Macintosh 47 on a wired network Windows 47 settings document ty
251. magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt Auto Size Sense gt gt Copy to gt Auto Size Match gt gt Copy It The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document Example 2 Copying on a single paper size 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt Mixed Sizes gt gt Copy to gt Letter gt 4 gt Copy It The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned and then scales the mixed paper sizes to fit on the paper size loaded in the printer Copying on both sides of the paper duplexing 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner gla
252. mail Opens the E mail menus Fax Opens the Fax menus Opens the printer menus These menus are available only when the printer is in the Ready state FTP Opens the File Transfer Protocol FTP menus Status message bar e Shows the current printer status such as Ready or Busy Shows printer conditions such as Toner Low Shows intervention messages so the printer can continue processing Status Supplies Displays a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue processing Touch this button to access the messages screen for more information on the message USB Displays the files on a USB drive Bookmarks Lets you create organize and save a set of bookmarks URL into a tree view of folders and file links Held Jobs Displays all current held jobs J Other buttons that may appear on the home screen Display item Function Release Held Fax If this button is shown then there are held faxes with a scheduled hold time previously set To access the list of held faxes touch this button Lock Device This button appears on the screen when the printer is unlocked and password has been set Touching this button opens a password entry screen Enter the correct password to lock the printer control panel Learning about the printer 15 Display item Function Unlock Device This button appears on the screen when the printer is locked The printer control panel but
253. ment is governed by the laws of the Commonwealth of Kentucky United States of America No choice of law rules in any jurisdiction shall apply The UN Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS The Software Program has been developed entirely at private expense Rights of the United States Government to use the Software Program is as set forth in this Agreement and as restricted in DFARS 252 227 7014 and in similar FAR provisions or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause CONSENT TO USE OF DATA You agree that Lexmark its affiliates and agents may collect and use information you provide in relation to support services performed with respect to the Software Program and requested by you Lexmark agrees not to use this information in a form that personally identifies you except to the extent necessary to provide such services EXPORT RESTRICTIONS You may not a acquire ship transfer or reexport directly or indirectly the Software Program or any direct product therefrom in violation of any applicable export laws or b permit the Software Program to be used for any purpose prohibited by such export laws including without limitation nuclear chemical or biological weapons proliferation AGREEMENT TO CONTRACT ELECTRONICALLY You and Lexmark agree to form this License Agreement electronically This means that when you click the Agree or Yes button on
254. ment was printed using a color laser printer Black White Laser Black White Laser is used when the original document was printed using a Photo Fil black white laser printer oto Film Newspaper Inkjet is used when the original document was printed using a inkjet printer Other Photo Film is used when the original document is a photo from film Magazine is used when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper is used when the original document is from a newspaper Pressis used when the original document was printed using a printing press Other is used when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Color Specifies whether or not copies are printed in color On Note On is the factory default setting Off Allow color copies Lets you enable or disable color in copying On Notes Off Onisthe factory default setting Setting this to Off will hide all color specific menus This setting overrides the Color setting Sides Duplex Specifies whether an original documentis duplex two sided or simplex one sided 1 sided to 1 sided and then specifies whether the copy should be duplex or simplex 1 sided to 2 sided Notes 2 sided to 1 sided 2 sided to 2 sided 1sidedto 1 sided The original page has printing on one side and the copied SUAM page will also have printing on one side e 1sidedto2sided The original page has printing on one side while the copied page will have printing on both si
255. menu appears 5 From the Configuration menu navigate to Scanner Manual Registration Print Quick Test 6 Align the scanner glass or ADF Aligning the scanner glass a Placethe Quick Test page facedown on the scanner glass b Touch Copy Quick Test The scanner prints a copy of the Quick Test page c Touch Flatbed d Usethe copy of the Quick Test page to adjust the Left Margin and Top Margin settings Maintaining the printer 227 e Touch Submit Copy Quick Test f Compare the new copy to the original Repeat the scanner glass alignment steps until the position on the page ofthe Quick Test copy closely matches the original Aligning the ADF a Doone of the following e To align the ADF front place the Quick Test page faceup short edge first into the ADF Toalign the ADF back place the Quick Test page facedown short edge first into the ADF b Touch Copy Quick Test The scanner prints a copy of the Quick Test page Touch ADF Front or ADF Back Use the copy of the Quick Test page to adjust the Horizontal Adjust and Top Margin settings Touch Submit Copy Quick Test 0 Q n Compare the new copy to the original Repeat the ADF alignment steps until the position on the page of the Quick Test copy closely matches the original 7 Touch Back Exit Configuration Storing supplies Choose a cool clean storage area for the printer supplies Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you are ready
256. menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Solutions gt Embedded Solutions gt System tab gt Log Printer cannot scan to the selected destination MAKE SURE THE DESTINATION IS VALID Verify that the destination is valid in the application configuration settings If the destination has been moved the network address may have changed The destination network address can be accessed from the Embedded Web Server For information on accessing or editing a destination see Editing a destination IF THE PRINTER AND DESTINATION RESIDE IN DIFFERENT DOMAINS THEN MAKE SURE THE DOMAIN INFORMATION IS SPECIFIED If the destination exists within a different Windows domain than the printer you can edit the destination from the application s configuration page and enter the appropriate Windows domain information in the domain field as part of the Network Folder Address Add the domain name to the Domain Search Order list under the printer network setup For information on adding or editing domain names see Specifying the Domain Search Order Troubleshooting 283 MAKE SURE THE FIREWALL SOFTWARE IS ALLOWING COMMUNICATION Ifthe destination resides on a computer that uses a newer version of the Windows operating system Windows XP or later and the Windows Firewall is enabled the printer may have difficulty sending information to the destination if the destination and the printer reside on different sub
257. mi po adavky a dal mi p slu n mi ustanoven mi sm rnice 1999 5 ES Dansk Lexmark International Inc erkl rer herved at dette produkt overholder de v sentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Deutsch Hiermit erkl rt Lexmark International Inc dass sich das Ger t dieses Ger t in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschl gigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999 5 EG befindet EMAnvik ME THN IAPOYZA H LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL INC AHAONEI OTI AYTO TO MPO ON ZYMMOPOONETAI NPOZ TIZ OYZIOAEIZ ANAITHZEIZ KAI TIZ AOITIEX ZXETIKE2 AIATAZEI2 TH OAHTIA 1999 5 EK English Hereby Lexmark International Inc declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Espa ol Por medio de la presente Lexmark International Inc declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999 5 CE Notices 317 Eesti K esolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International Inc et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999 5 EU p hin uetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele s tetele Suomi Lexmark International Inc vakuuttaa t ten ett t m tuote on direktiivin 1999 5 EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja muiden sit koskevien direktiivin ehtojen
258. middle Notes Bottom middle Off e Off is the factory default setting for Bottom middle Date Time All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Custom text Understanding printer menus 176 Header Footer Bottom right Bottom right Off Date Time Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Custom text Menu item Description Specifies header footer information for the bottom right of the page Notes e Off is the factory default setting for Bottom right All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Overlay Off Confidential Copy Draft Urgent Custom Specifies the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job Note Off is the factory default setting Custom Overlay Specifies the custom overlay text Note A maximum of 64 characters is allowed Allow priority copies On Off Allows interruption of a print job to copy a page or document Note On is the factory default setting Custom Job scanning Off On Lets you copy in a single copy job a document that contains mixed paper sizes Notes Offis the factory default setting This menu item appears only if a valid printer hard drive is installed Allow Save as Shortcut Lets you save custom copy settings as shortcuts On Note On is the factory default
259. more than one WEP key enter up to four in the provided spaces Select the key currently in use on the network by selecting the Default WEP Transmit Key Or WPA or WPA2 passphrase WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security The choices are AES or TKIP Encryption must be set for the same type on the router and on the printer or the printer will not be able to communicate on the network No security If your wireless network does not use any type of security then you will not have any security information Note Using an unsecured wireless network is not recommended If you are installing the printer on an 802 1X network using the Advanced method then you may need the following Authentication type nner authentication type 802 1X username and password Certificates Note For more information on configuring 802 1X security see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD Installing the printer on a wireless network Windows Before you install the printer on a wireless network make sure Your wireless network is set up and working properly The computer you are using is connected to the same wireless network where you want to set up the printer Additional printer setup 42 1 Connect the power cable to the printer and then toa properly grounded electrical outlet and then turn the printer on Make sure the printer and computer are fully on and ready Do not connect the U
260. n 76 2 x 127 mm X X X JV X 3x5 in to 215 9 x 914 4 mm 8 5 x 36 in 76 2x 127 mm X X X J X 3x5 in to 215 9x 1219 2 mm 8 5 x 48 in 73 4Envelope 98 4x190 5 mm X X X J X Monarch 3 875 x 7 5 in 9 Envelope 98 4x226 1mm X X X v X 3 875 x 8 9 in Com 10 104 8 x 241 3 mm X X X J X Envelope 4 12 x 9 5 in DL Envelope 110 x 220mm X X X J X 4 33 x 8 66 in C5 Envelope 162 x 229 mm X X X JV X 6 38 x 9 01 in B5 Envelope 176 x 250 mm X X X J X 6 93 x 9 84 in Other 85 7x 165mm to X X X v X Envelope 215 9 x 355 6 mm 3 375 x 6 50 in to 8 5 x 14 in Supported by X790 models only This formats the envelope size setting for 215 9 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 in unless the size is specified by the software application Paper and specialty media guidelines 77 Supported paper types and weights The printer supports 60 176 g m 16 47 Ib paper weights for one sided printing Two sided printing is supported on 64 176 g m 17 47 Ib paper weights Note Labels transparencies envelopes and card stock always print at reduced speed Paper type Standard Optional Optional Multipurpose Duplexer 550 sheet tray 550 sheet tray 2 000 sheet feeder Tray 1 tray Paper v v v v v Plain Bond Glossy Colored Custom Type x Letterhead Light Heavy Preprinted Rough Cotton Recycled Card stock v v X J Transparencies X X X J X Labels v J x JV Paper Viny
261. n turn up the volume to verify a dial tone TEMPORARILY DISCONNECT OTHER EQUIPMENT To ensure the printer is working correctly connect it directly to the telephone line Disconnect any answering machines computers with modems or telephone line splitters CHECK FOR JAMS Clear any jams and then make sure that Ready appears TEMPORARILY DISABLE CALL WAITING Call Waiting can disruptfaxtransmissions Disable this feature before sending or receiving a fax Call yourtelephone company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling Call Waiting Voice MAIL SERVICE MAY BE INTERFERING WITH THE FAX TRANSMISSION Voice Mail offered through your local telephone company may disrupt fax transmissions To enable both Voice Mail and the printer to answer calls you may want to consider adding a second telephone line for the printer Troubleshooting 279 THE PRINTER MEMORY MAY BE FULL 1 Dial the fax number 2 Scanthe original document one page at a time Can send but not receive faxes Try one or more of the following LOAD PAPER If the tray is empty then load paper in the tray or feeder CHECK THE RING COUNT DELAY SETTINGS The ring count delay sets the number of times the phone rings before the printer answers If you have extension phones on the same line as the printer or subscribe to the telephone company s Distinctive Ring service then keep the Ring Delay setting at 4 1 Type the printer IP address in the address fiel
262. nch after a minute then do the following a Click 9 or click Start and then click Run b In the Start Search or Run box type D setup exe where Dis the letter of your CD or DVD drive 3 Click Recommended Install and then follow the instructions on the computer screen For Macintosh users 1 Close all open software applications 2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD and then double click the software installer package 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Using the World Wide Web 1 Goto the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com 2 From the Drivers amp Downloads menu click Driver Finder 3 Select your printer and then select your operating system 4 Download the driver and then install it Additional printer setup 40 Updating available options in the printer driver Oncethe printer software and any options are installed it may be necessary to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs For Windows users 1 Open the Printers folder a Click or click Start and then click Run b Inthe Start Search or Run box type control printers C Press Enter or click OK 2 Select your printer 3 Right click the printer and then select Properties 4 Click the Configuration tab 5 Click Update Now Ask Printer or manually add any installed hardware options under Configuration Options 6 Click Apply For Macintosh users In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later 1 From the
263. ne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse Ce filtre doit tre utilis pour toute installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes t l phoniques suisses Notices 514 Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz F r dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Z hlzeichen bertragung Lexmark Teilenummer 14B5109 oder 80D1877 f r jede Leitung installiert werden ber die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte bertragen werden Die Verwendung des Lexmark Filters ist obligatorisch da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte vorhanden sind Uso del prodotto in Svizzera Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero codice Lexmark 14B5109 o 80D1877 da installare su tutte le linee che ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera E necessario utilizzare il filtro Lexmark poich gli impulsi remoti sono presenti su tutte le linee analogiche in Svizzera Notice to Users in the European Union Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 1999 5 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relatingto electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designedfor use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark Internat
264. nets The Windows Firewall must either be configured to allow communication with the subnet the printer resides on or the destination should be set up on the same subnet as the printer MAKE SURE A FILE WITH THE DEFAULT FILE NAME DOES NOT ALREADY EXIST IN THE DESTINATION If the three configuration settings for the File Name section of the solution s configuration page are not selected allow user to enter file name append time stamp overwrite existing file and a file using the default file name already exists within the destination there will be no method in place to distinguish the newly scanned file from the file present in the destination The printer will not be able to overwrite the old file the new file will not receive atime stamp to differentiate it from the old file and the user will not be able to give the new file a different name In this case the old file must either be removed from the destination or one of the previously mentioned settings must be turned on MAKE SURE THE NETWORK IS FUNCTIONING AND THE PRINTER CAN COMMUNICATE Verify all network connections and that the network settings of the printer are configured appropriately For information on networking the printer see the User s Guide and additional documentation on the Software and Documentation CD that shipped with the printer For NETWORKS USING LDAP AUTHENTICATION MAKE SURE LDAP sETTINGS HAVE BEEN CONFIGURED CORRECTLY Verify that LDAP settings are configured a
265. ng The 203 mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing of eighty 10 pitch characters PCL Emulation Settings Auto CR after LF Off On Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return CR after a line feed LF control command Note Off is the factory default setting PCL Emulation Settings Auto LF after CR Off On Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a line feed LF after a carriage return CR control command Note Off is the factory default setting Tray Renumber Assign MP Feeder Off None 0 199 Assign Tray x Off None 0 199 Assign Manual Paper Off None 0 199 Assign Manual Env Off None 0 199 Configures the printer to work with printer software or programs that use different source assignments for trays drawers and feeders Notes Offis the factory default setting None ignores the Select Paper Feed command This selection is displayed only when it is selected by the PCL 5e interpreter 0 199 allows a custom setting to be assigned Tray Renumber View Factory Defaults MPF Default 8 T1 Default 1 T2 Default 4 T3 Default 5 T4 Default 20 T5 Default 21 Env Default 6 MPaper Default 2 MEnv Default 3 Displays the factory default setting assigned to each tray drawer or feeder Understanding printer menus 214 Tray Renumber Menu item Restore Defaults Description Returns all t
266. ng 100 E mailing ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings You can use the printer to e mail scanned documents to one or more recipients There are three ways to send an e mail from the printer You can type the e mail address use a shortcut number or use the address book Getting ready to e mail Setting up the e mail function 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Under Default Settings click E mail FTP Settings 4 Click E mail Settings Setup E mail Server 5 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information 6 Click Submit Configuring e mail settings 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section E mailing 101 2
267. ng a fax at a scheduled time 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax enter the fax number Options Advanced Options Delayed Send Note If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server the Delayed Send button will not appear Faxes waiting for transmission are listed in the Fax Queue 4 Touch the arrows to adjust the time the fax will be transmitted The time is increased or decreased in increments of 30 minutes If the current time is shown the left arrow is unavailable 5 Touch Fax It Note The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time Viewing a fax log 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Reports gt Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log Faxing 117 Blocking junk faxes 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do
268. ng on letter or A4 size plain paper Ordering a print cartridge When 88 color cartridge lowor88 color cartridge nearly low appears order a new cartridge Estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO IEC 19798 standard Extremely low print coverage less than 1 2596 for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield and may cause cartridge parts to fail prior to exhaustion of toner Recommended print cartridge and part number Part name Lexmark Return Program Cartridge Regular cartridge Cyan Print Cartridge C792A1CG C792A2CG Cyan Extra High Yield Print Cartridge C792X1CG C792X2CG Magenta Print Cartridge C792A1MG C792A2MG Magenta Extra High Yield Print Cartridge C792X1MG C792X2MG Yellow Print Cartridge C792A1YG C792A2YG Yellow Extra High Yield Print Cartridge C792X1YG C792X2YG Black Print Cartridge C792A1KG C792A2KG Black Extra High Yield Print Cartridge C792X1KG C792X2KG J Maintaining the printer 229 Ordering a fuser or a transfer module When 80 Fuser Life Warningor83 Transfer Module Life Warning appears order a replacement fuser or a transfer module When 80 Replace Fuseror83 Replace Transfer Module appears install the new fuser or the new transfer module For installation information see the documentation that came with the part Part name Part number Fuser 40X7102 40X7100 40X7101 Transfer Module 40X7103 Ordering a waste toner bottle When 82 Waste toner bottle near
269. ng such intellectual property may be found at http go microsoft com fwlink Linkld 52369 This product is based on Microsoft Print Schema technology You may find the terms and conditions upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property at http go microsoft com fwlink Linkld 83288 ADOBE SYSTEMS INCORPORATED NOTICE Contains Flash Flash Lite and or Reader technology by Adobe Systems Incorporated Notices 323 This Product contains Adobe Flash player software under license from Adobe Systems Incorporated Copyright 1995 2007 Adobe Macromedia Software LLC All rights reserved Adobe Reader and Flash are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Notices 324 Index Numerics 1565 Emulation error load emulation option 269 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder installing 37 200 paper jam 242 2000 sheet high capacity feeder loading 66 201 paper jam 242 202 203 paper jams 243 230 paper jam 244 231 239 paper jams 245 24x paper jam 245 250 paper jam 246 280 289 paper jam 247 290 292 paper jams 248 31 xx Missing or Defective color cartridge 262 32 xx color cartridge part number unsupported by device 262 34 Incorrect paper size open src 262 35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 262 37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation 263 37 Insufficient memory to collate job 263 37 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted 263 38 Memory fu
270. nter model type and serial number For more information see the label on the inside top front cover of the printer The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page In the U S or Canada call 1 800 539 6275 For other countries or regions visit the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com Troubleshooting 505 Notices Product information Product name Lexmark X792de X792dte X792dtfe X792dtpe X792dtme X792dtse Machine type 7562 4917 Model s 432 436 dn1 dn2 gd1 gd2 dt1 dt2 gt1 gt2 df1 df2 gf1 gf2 d01 d02 g01 902 t01 t02 991 992 f01 f02 981 g82 Edition notice August 2010 The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL INC PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in later editions Improvements or changes in the products or the programs described may be made at any time References in this publication to products programs or service
271. ntrol panel Eanes keyboard Francais Canadien Deutsch Italiano Espanol Greek Dansk Norsk Nederlands Svenska Suomi Portuguese Russian Polski Swiss German Swiss French Korean Magyar Turkish Czech Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Japanese Custom Key x Understanding printer menus 166 Menu item Paper Sizes US Metric Description Notes US is the factory default setting Initial setting is determined by your country or region selection in the initial setup wizard Changingthis setting also changesthe Units of Measurement setting in the Universal Setup menu and the default for each input source in the Paper Size Paper Type menu Scan to PC Port Range port range Displayed Information Left side Right side Custom Text x Specifies a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking firewall The valid ports are specified by two sets of numbers separated by a semicolon Note 9751 12000 is the factory default setting Specifies what is displayed on the upper left and right corners of the home screen For the Left side and Right side options choose from the following options None IP Address Hostname Contact Name Location Date Time mDNS DDNS Service Name Zero Configuration Name Custom Text x Model Name Notes e IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side Date Time is the factory default setting for Right side Understanding
272. nue Follow the instructions on the computer screen and then select Guided Setup Recommended Attach the appropriate cable to the computer and to the printer when instructed to do so oO Uu A W Select your printer from the list and then click Continue Note If your configured printer does not appear in the list then click Modify Search 7 Follow the instructions on the computer screen For Macintosh users 1 Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer 2 Obtain the printer IP address a From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Network Setup Page b Inthe TCP IP section of the network setup page look for IP Address Note You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer 3 Install the drivers and then add the printer a Install a PPD file on the computer 1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD and then double click the installer package for the printer 2 Follow the instructions on the computer screen 3 Select a destination and then click Continue Additional printer setup 47 4 From the Easy Install screen click Install 5 Enter the user password and then click OK All the necessary software is installed on the computer 6 Click Close when installation is complete b Add the printer e For IP printing In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later 1 From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences Print
273. o custom string 253 Change src to custom string load orientation 253 Change src to custom type name 253 Change src to size 254 Change src to size type 254 Change src to size type load orientation 254 Change src to size load orientation 254 Check src orientation or guides 255 checking an unresponsive printer 270 checking an unresponsive scanner 276 checking printer status on Embedded Web Server 237 checking printer status using the Embedded Web Server 237 checking status of supplies 228 checking the status of supplies 228 checking the virtual display using the Embedded Web Server 238 checking virtual display using the Embedded Web Server 238 choosing a fax connection 109 cleaning ADF parts 224 exterior of the printer 222 scanner glass 223 cleaning kit ordering 231 cleaning the printhead lenses 226 Close tray door 255 Close finisher side door 255 Close finisher top cover 255 Close front door 255 Close left side door 255 Close paper transport cover 255 Close top access cover 255 collating copies 95 confidential print jobs 82 printing from a Macintosh computer 82 printing from Windows 82 Confidential Print menu 162 configuration information wireless network 41 configurations printer 10 Configure MP menu 137 configuring e mail settings 101 configuring port settings 49 connecting printer to distinctive ring service 112 connecting the printer to regional adapters 112 conserv
274. ocation for downloads Notes RAMis the factory default setting Storing downloads in RAM is temporary Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk places them in permanent storage Downloads remain in flash memory or on the printer hard disk even when the printer is turned off This menu item appears only if a flash and or disk option is installed Resource Save Off On Specifies how the printer handles temporary downloads such as fonts and macros stored in RAM when the printer receives a print job that requires more memory than is available Notes Offisthe factory default setting Off sets the printer to retain downloads only until memory is needed Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs Onsetsthe printer to retain downloads during language changes and printer resets If the printer runs out of memory 38 Memory Fullappears but downloads are not deleted Print All Order Alphabetical Oldest First Newest First Specifies the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed when Print All is selected Notes Alphabetical is the factory default setting Print jobs always appear in alphabetical order on the printer control panel p Understanding printer menus 205 Finishing menu Menu item Sides Duplex 1 sided 2 sided Description Specifies whether duplex 2 sided printing is set as the default for all print jobs Notes
275. ogram Help topics Manual color correction may be necessary to utilize the selected color conversion table for the particular object Troubleshooting 503 Selecting which Color Samples set to use for a particular color matching problem depends on the Color Correction setting being used Auto Off or Manual the type of object being printed text graphics or images and how the color of the object is specified in the software program RGB or CMYK combinations When the printer Color Correction setting is set to Off the color is based on the print job information and no color conversion is implemented Note The Color Samples pages are not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK combinations Additionally certain situations exist in which the software program or the computer operating system adjusts the RGB or CMYK combinations specified in the program through color management The resulting printed color may not be an exact match of the Color Samples pages What are detailed Color Samples and how do access them Detailed Color Samples sets are available only through the Embedded Web Server of a network printer A detailed Color Samples set contains a range of shades displayed as colored boxes that are similar to a user defined RGB or CMYK value The likeness of the colors in the set are dependent on the value entered in the RGB or CMYK Increment box To access a detailed Color Samples set from the Embedd
276. on icon is missing from the home screen For the application to work at least one valid destination must be enabled If no valid destinations are available then the application icon will disappear from the home screen To display the application icon when no destinations are available 1 From the application configuration settings under Home Screen Button select Always show button under Display Option 2 Click Apply An application error has occurred CHECK THE SYSTEM LOG FOR RELEVANT DETAILS 1 Type the printer IP address or hostname in the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Solutions gt Embedded Solutions gt System tab gt Log MAKE SURE THE FILENAME YOU WANT TO SCAN TO IS NOT ALREADY IN USE Verify that the file to which you want to scan is not open by another application or user To help prevent errors make sure either Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file is selected in the destination configuration settings ADJUST THE SCAN SETTINGS In the destination configuration settings lower the scan settings For example lower the scan resolution disable Color or change the Content type to Text CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT If you sti
277. one Handset Answering machine Troubleshooting 278 CHECK THE TELEPHONE WALL JACK 1 Plug a telephone into the wall jack 2 Listen for a dial tone 3 If you do not hear a dial tone then plug a different telephone into the wall jack 4 If you still do not hear a dial tone then plug a telephone into a different wall jack 5 f you hear a dial tone then connect the printer to that wall jack REVIEW THIS DIGITAL PHONE SERVICE CHECKLIST The fax modem is an analog device Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone services can be used e fyouareusing an ISDN telephone service then connect the printer to an analog telephone port an R interface port on an ISDN terminal adapter For more information and to request an R interface port contact your ISDN provider f youare using DSL then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use For more information contact your DSL provider f you are using a PBX telephone service then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX If none exists consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine CHECK FOR A DIAL TONE Place a test call to the telephone number to which you want to send a fax to make sure that it is working correctly e fthetelephoneline is being used by another device then wait until the other device is finished before sending a fax f you are using the On Hook Dial feature the
278. onnect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the other end ofthetelephone cable to the adapter and then connect the adapter to the active telephone wall jack Note Your telephone adapter may look different than the one shown It will fit the wall jack used in your location Setting the outgoing fax or station name and number 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup 3 Inthe Fax Name or Station Name field enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes 4 In the Fax Number or Station Number field enter the printer fax number 5 Click Submit Setting the date and time You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send If there is a power failure then you may have to reset the date and time 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locat
279. ons about recycling options visit the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com for your local sales office phone number Static sensitivity notice This symbol identifies static sensitive parts Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the metal frame of the printer ENERGY STAR Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start up screen is certified to comply with Environmental Protection Agency EPA ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark ENERGY STAR Notices 309 Temperature information Ambient temperature 15 6 to 32 2 C 60 to 90 F Shipping and storage temperature 40 to 40 C 104 F Laser notice This product contains a Class I 1 laser producing invisible laser radiation The printer is certified in the U S to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Subchapter J for Class 1 laser products and elsewhere is certified as a Class laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825 1 Class laser products are not considered to be hazardous The printer contains internally a Class Illb 3b AlGaAs dual beam laser enclosed in a non serviceable printhead assembly operating in the wavelength of 775 800 nanometers The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation exceeding Class levels during normal operation user maintenance or prescribed service condition Laser ad
280. ons for each type are Card Stock Bin Disabled Transparency Bin Standard Bin Recycled Bin Bin x Glossy Bin Note Disabled is the factory default setting Heavy Glossy Bin Labels Bin Vinyl Labels Bin Bond Bin Envelope Bin Rough Envelope Bin Letterhead Bin Preprinted Bin Colored Bin Light Paper Bin Heavy Paper Bin Rough Cotton Bin Custom x Bin Reports menu Reports menu Menu item Description Menu Settings Page Prints a report containing information about the paper loaded into trays installed memory total page count alarms timeouts printer control panel language TCP IP address status of supplies status of the network connection and other information Device Statistics Prints a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and details about printed pages Network Setup Page Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address information Note This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected to print servers Network x Setup Page Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address information Notes This menu item is available when there is more than one network option installed This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected to print servers Understanding printer menus 146 Menu it
281. op edge for landscape Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape JPEG Quality Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the Best for Content image 5 90 Notes Best for content is the factory default setting 5reduces the file size but the quality of the image is lessened 90 provides the best image quality but the file size is very large This menu item applies to all scan functions Text Default Sets the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image 5 90 Note 75 is the factory default setting Text Photo Default 5 90 Sets the quality of a text photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 75 is the factory default setting Photo Default 5 90 Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 50 is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 196 Menu item Use Multi Page TIFF On Off Transmission Log Print log Do not print log Print only for error Provides a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to FTP job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Notes On is the factory default setting This menu item applies to
282. or and then remove the jammed paper 2 24x Open side door of the specified tray and then remove the jammed paper 3 250 Remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder and them remove the jammed paper 4 280 289 Remove all paper from the ADF and them remove the jammed paper 290 292 Close the ADF cover 5 400 403 Open the paper transport unit door and then remove the jammed paper 460 461 6 431 438 Push the button to slide the finisher to the right open the finisher door and then remove the jammed paper 7 455 Open staple door remove the staple cartridge and then remove the jammed staple Clearing jams 241 200 paper jam 1 Open the side door of the printer A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Close the side door of the printer 4 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared 201 paper jam 1 Open the side door of the printer A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 2 Determine where the jam is located and then remove it a If paper is inside the fuser unit then open the fuser access door b Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and
283. or is set to Off 1 bit Note 8 bit is the factory default setting File Name Lets you enter a base file name Note A maximum of 53 characters is allowed Custom Job Scanning Off On Lets you copy a document containing mixed paper sizes in a single copy job Note Off is the factory default setting Scan Preview Off On Specifies whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Background Removal 4to4 Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting Enables an equal balance of colors in the scanned image Understanding printer menus 201 Color Dropout Color Dropout Menu item Description Specifies which color to drop during scanning and how much to increase or decrease the dropout None Notes Red Geen None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout Blue 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Contrast Specifies the contrast of the scanned image Best for content Note Best for content is the factory default setting 0 5 Mirror Image Creates a mirror image of the original document Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Negative Image Creates a negative image of the original document Off Note Of
284. ore Information 2 Touch Continue to clear the message 34 Incorrect paper size open Isrcl Try one or more of the following e Load the appropriate paper or specialty media in the proper tray Confirm that the wheel on tray 1 is set to the paper size loaded in the tray Make sure this size is the size you are trying to print Touch Continue to clear the message and print using a different tray Check length and width guides of the tray and make sure the paper is properly loaded in the tray Make sure the Print Properties or Print dialog settings have the correct paper size and type Check that the paper size is correctly set For example if the MP Feeder Size is set to Universal make sure the paper is large enough for the data being printed Cancel the print job 35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to disable Resource Save and continue printing To enable Resource Save after receiving this message make sure the link buffers are set to Auto and then exit the menus to activate the link buffer changes When Ready appears enable Resource Save Install additional memory Troubleshooting 262 37 Insufficient memory to collate job Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to print the portion of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job Cancel the current print job 37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory
285. ory default setting Heavy Glossy Loading Off Duplex Labels Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Heavy Glossy as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Labels as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Vinyl Labels Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Vinyl Labels as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Bond Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Bond as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Letterhead Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Letterhead as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Preprinted Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Preprinted as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Colored Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Colored as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Light Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Light as the paper type Note Off is the factory
286. ory default setting Header Footer Specifies header footer information for the top left of the page Top left Notes Top left Off Offisthe factory default setting for Top left Date Time All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Header Footer Top middle Top middle Off Date Time Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Custom text Specifies header footer information for the middle of the page Notes Offisthe factory default setting for Top middle All pagesis the factory default setting for Print on Understanding printer menus 175 Menu item Description Header Footer Specifies header footer information for the top right of the page Top right Notes Top right Off Off is the factory default setting for Top right Date Time All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Custom text Header Footer Specifies header footer information for the bottom left of the page Bottom left Notes Bottom left Off e Off is the factory default setting for Bottom left Date Time All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Custom text Header Footer Specifies header footer information for the bottom middle of the page Bottom
287. ot subject the power cord to abrasion or stress Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture and walls If any of these things happen a risk of fire or electrical shock results Inspect the power cord regularly for signs of such problems Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it Safety information 7 Refer service or repairs other than those described in the user documentation to a professional service person A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm Do not set up this product ormakeany electrical or cabling connections suchas the fax feature power cord or telephone during a lightning storm A CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high capacity input tray a duplex unit and an input option or more than one input option If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each paper drawer or tray separately Keep all ot
288. other than Custom Type x for each of the custom paper types loaded into the printer 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Paper Menu gt Custom Types gt select the custom name you want to configure gt select a paper or specialty media type Submit Loading paper and specialty media 72 Paper and specialty media guidelines Paper guidelines Paper characteristics Thefollowing paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability Consider these characteristics when evaluating new paper stock Weight The printer can automatically feed paper weights from 60 to 176 g m 16 to 47 Ib bond grain long Paper lighter than 60 g m 16 Ib might not be stiff enough to feed properly causing jams For best performance use 75 g m 20 Ib bond grain long paper For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm 7 2 x 10 1 in we recommend 90 g m 24 Ib or heavier paper Note Duplex is supported only for 63 g m 176 g m 17 Ib 47 Ib bond paper Curl Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems Curl can occur after the paper passes through the printe
289. owersettingsconserve more energy but may require longer warm up times Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use Under most circumstances this keeps the printer ready to print with minimum warm up time Understanding printer menus 170 Menu item Description Timeouts Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before Screen Timeout returning the printer display to a Ready state 15 300 sec Note 30 seconds is the factory default setting Timeouts Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an Print Timeout end of job message before canceling the remainder of the print Disabled job 1 255 sec Notes 90 seconds is the factory default setting When the timer expires any partially printed page still in the printer is printed and then the printer checks to see if any new print jobs are waiting Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs Timeouts Sets the amount oftime in secondsthe printer waits for additional Wait Timeout data before canceling a print job 15 65535 sec Notes Disabled 40 seconds is the factory default setting Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using PostScript emulation This setting has no effect on PCL emulation print jobs Timeouts Sets the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention Job Hold Timeout before it holds jobs that require unavaila
290. owing topics may help you solve print quality problems If these suggestions do not correct the problem contact Customer Support You may have a printer part that requires adjustment or replacement Isolating print quality problems Print the print quality test pages to help isolate print quality problems 1 Turn the printer off 2 Load letter or A4 size paper in the tray or feeder 3 Hold down EZ and Eg while turning the printer on 4 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears 5 Touch Print Quality Pages gt Print Quality Pages The print quality test pages print 6 Touch Back Exit Config Menu Troubleshooting 288 Printer is printing blank pages Try one or more of the following MAKE SURE THERE IS NO PACKING MATERIAL LEFT ON THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE Remove the cartridge and make sure the packing material is properly removed Reinstall the cartridge MAKE SURE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER When 88 xx color cartridge low appears make sure that toner is distributed evenly among all four cartridges 1 Remove the cartridge Warning Potential Damage Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs 2 Firmly shake the cartridge side to side and front to back several times to redistribute the toner 3 Reinsert the cartridge Note If
291. ownload Use of the Freeware by you shall be governed entirely by the terms and conditions of such license TRANSFER You may transfer the Software Program to another end user Any transfer must include all software components media printed materials and this License Agreement and you may not retain copies ofthe Software Program or components thereof The transfer may not bean indirect transfer such as a consignment Priorto the transfer the end user receiving the transferred Software Program must agree to all these License Agreement terms Upon transfer of the Software Program your license is automatically terminated You may not rent sublicense or assign the Software Program except to the extent provided in this License Agreement and any attempt to do so shall be void UPGRADES To Use a Software Program identified as an upgrade you must first be licensed to the original Software Program identified by Lexmark as eligible for the upgrade After upgrading you may no longer use the original Software Program that formed the basis for your upgrade eligibility LIMITATION ON REVERSE ENGINEERING You may not alter decrypt reverse engineer reverse assemble reverse compile or otherwise translate the Software Program except as and to the extent expressly permitted to do so by applicable law for the purposes of inter operability error correction and security testing If you have such statutory rights you will notify Lexmark in writing of any int
292. p menu 179 Fax Mode Fax Server Setup menu 187 Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator 256 fax screen advanced options 119 120 options 119 Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator 256 Fax Station Name not set up 257 Fax Station Number not set up 257 fax troubleshooting caller ID is not shown 278 can receive but not send faxes 280 can send but not receive faxes 280 cannot send or receive a fax 278 received fax has poor print quality 281 faxing blocking junk faxes 118 canceling a fax job 118 changing resolution 116 choosing a fax connection 109 configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time 114 creating shortcuts using the Embedded Web Server 115 creating shortcuts using the touch screen 115 distinctive ring service 112 faxsetup 109 forwarding faxes 121 holding faxes 120 making a fax lighter or darker 117 sending a fax at a scheduled time 117 sending using the computer 114 sending using the touch screen 114 setting the date and time 113 setting the fax number or station number 113 setting the outgoing fax name or station name 113 using shortcuts 116 using the address book 116 viewing a faxlog 117 FCC notices 308 312 315 features Scan Center 128 fiber optic network setup 47 finding more information about the printer 9 finisher finishing features 86 supported paper sizes 86 finisher features 86 Finishing menu 206 firmware card installing 25 flash drive prin
293. p short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy Content 4 Touch the button that best represents the content type of the document you are copying Text Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphic Use when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Text Photo Use when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Photo Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image 5 Touch 6 Touch the button that best represents the content source of the document you are copying Color Laser Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Use when the original document was printed using a black white laser printer e Inkjet Use when the original document was printed using a inkjet printer Photo Film Use when the original document is a photo from film Copying 94 Magazine Use when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper Use when the original document is from a newspaper Press Use when the original document was printed usin
294. page 40 printing confidential and other held jobs from a Macintosh computer 82 from Windows 82 printing from a flash drive 84 printing in black and white 86 printing on letterhead 79 printing print quality test pages 86 publications where to find 9 Q Quality menu 208 Quiet Mode print quality troubleshooting 291 R Reattach bin x 260 Reattach bin x y 260 reattaching the system board cover 20 recycled paper using 56 74 recycling Lexmark packaging 61 Lexmark products 60 toner cartridges 61 WEEE statement 309 reducing a copy 94 reducing printer noise 57 Index 532 Remove packaging material area name 261 Remove paper from linked bin set name 261 Remove paper from all bins 261 Remove paper from bin x 261 Remove paper from standard output bin 261 removing printer hard disk 36 repeat print jobs 82 printing from a Macintosh computer 82 printing from Windows 82 repeating print defects 296 replacing a print cartridge 231 replacing the waste toner bottle 234 reports viewing 238 Reports menu 146 reserve print jobs 82 printing from a Macintosh computer 82 printing from Windows 82 resolution fax changing 116 Restore Held Jobs 261 restoring factory default settings 239 S safety information 7 8 saving paper 96 Scan Center features 128 scan to computer advanced options setting 130 options 129 130 original size 129 paper orientation setting 130 scan troubleshooting cannot scan fro
295. parator Roll and Pick Assembly separator pad Yes Select Yes to reset the supply counter No Select No to exit Cyan Cartridge Shows the status of the cyan toner cartridge Cartridge Nearly Low Cartridge Low Cartridge Very Low Cartridge Critically Low Invalid Replace Missing or Defective OK Unsupported Magenta Cartridge Shows the status of the magenta toner cartridge Cartridge Nearly Low Cartridge Low Cartridge Very Low Cartridge Critically Low Invalid Replace Missing or Defective OK Unsupported Yellow Cartridge Shows the status of the yellow toner cartridge Cartridge Nearly Low Cartridge Low Cartridge Very Low Cartridge Critically Low Invalid Replace Missing or Defective OK Unsupported Understanding printer menus 132 Menu item Description Black Cartridge Shows the status of the black toner cartridge Cartridge Nearly Low Cartridge Low Cartridge Very Low Cartridge Critically Low Invalid Replace Missing or Defective OK Unsupported Separator Roll and Pick Assembly Shows the status of the Separator Roll and Pick Assembly OK Replace Waste Toner Bottle Shows the status of the waste toner bottle Near Full Replace Missing OK Fuser Shows the status of the fuser Early Warning Low Replace Missing OK Transfer Module Shows the status of the transfer module Early Warning Low Replace Missing OK Staple Cartridge Shows the status of the staple cartridge Early Warning
296. pe fax 118 Setup menu 204 shadow images appear on prints 291 shipping the printer 236 shortcuts creating e mail 102 fax destination 115 FTP address 124 FTP destination 123 Sleep Mode adjusting 58 Slide finisher to the left 261 SMTP Setup menu 159 solid color or black pages appear on prints 297 Some held jobs were not restored 256 standard exit bin lighting setting 60 Standard Network menu 147 standard tray loading 63 Standard USB menu 153 staple cartridges ordering 230 staple jam clearing 455 staple jam 249 statement of volatility 218 status of supplies checking 228 storing paper 76 supplies 228 storing print jobs 82 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 298 streaks appear on a page 297 subject and message information adding to e mail 104 Substitute Size menu 138 supplies checking status 228 Index 333 checking from printer control panel 228 checking using the Embedded Web Server 228 conserving 56 storing 228 using recycled paper 56 Supplies menu 132 supplies ordering ADF pick assembly 230 cleaning kit 231 fuser or transfer module 230 print cartridges 229 separator roll 230 staple cartridges 230 waste toner bottle 230 Supply needed to complete job 261 supported flash drives 83 supported paper sizes 76 supported paper types and weights 78 system board accessing 20 system board cover attaching 20 reattaching 20 T TCP IP menu 150 telecommunication notices 312
297. pe loaded in the paper tray Try one or more of the following Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type Touch Use current src to ignore the message and print from the selected tray TouchPaper changed continue to continue printing afterthe correct paper size and type are loaded in the tray and are correctly specified in the printer control panel Paper menu Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Troubleshooting 253 Change src to Isizel Incomplete printing of texts and images may be caused by incorrect paper size or type loaded in the paper tray Try one or more of the following Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type Touch Use current src to ignore the message and print from the selected tray TouchPaper changed continue to continue printing afterthe correct paper size and type are loaded in the tray and are correctly specified in the printer control panel Paper menu Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Change src to size load orientation Incomplete printing of texts and images may be caused by incorrect paper size or type loaded in the paper tray Try one or more of the following Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type Touch Use current src to ignore the message and print from the selected tray TouchPaper changed continue to continue printing afterthe correct paper size and type are loaded in the tray and are correctly
298. performance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty you may recover actual damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph Lexmark s liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product that caused the damages This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS LOST SAVINGS INCIDENTAL DAMAGE OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark Lexmark s and its Suppliers and Remarketers limitations of remedies are not cumulative Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended beneficiaries of this limitation Additional rights Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights You may also have other rights that vary from state to state LEXMARK SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREE
299. phone numbers on one telephone line with each telephone number having a different ring pattern This may be useful for distinguishing between fax and voice calls If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service then follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack 3 Change the Distinctive Rings setting to match the setting you want for the printer to answer Note The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On This allows the printer to answer single double and triple ring patterns a From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Settings gt Distinctive Rings b Select the pattern setting you want to change and then touch Submit Connecting to an adapter for your country or region The following countries or regions may require a special adapter to connect the telephone cable to the active telephone wall jack Country Region Austria New Zealand Cyprus Netherlands Denmark Norway Finland Portugal France Sweden Germany Switzerland e Ireland United Kingdom Italy Faxing 112 For some countries or regions a telephone line adapter is included in the box Use this adapter to connect an answering machine telephone or other telecommunications equipment to the printer 1 C
300. pop up menus MAKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN DEFECTIVE OR EMPTY PRINT CARTRIDGE Replace the worn defective or empty print cartridge Streaked vertical lines B DE E CDE These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following Troubleshooting 298 THE TONER IS SMEARED Select another tray or feeder to feed paper for the job From the printer control panel select the Default Source from the Paper Menu For Windows users select the paper source from Print Properties For Macintosh users select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop up menus A TONER CARTRIDGE IS DEFECTIVE Replace the defective toner cartridge THE TRANSFER MODULE IS WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the transfer module Toner fog or background shading appears on a page Try one or more of the following MAKE SURE PRINT CARTRIDGES ARE INSTALLED CORRECTLY AND ARE NOT DEFECTIVE Reinstall or replace the print cartridge MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER BELT IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the transfer belt For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part MAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the fuser For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part MAKE SURE THERE IS NO TONER IN THE PAPER PATH Clean any visible toner from the paper path If the problem persists then contact customer support RECALIBRATE THE PRINTER Perform color adjust from th
301. ppropriately in your printer setup and in the setup dialog For more information on LDAP settings see Adding a destination and Configuring LDAP MAKE SURE YOU HAVE PERMISSION TO SAVE SCANS TO THIS DESTINATION On the application Edit Destination screen clear the contents of the Path Suffix field or on the destination server change the user s home folder to match the contents of the Path Suffix field Solving option problems Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following RESET THE PRINTER Turn the printer off wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer on Troubleshooting 284 CHECK TO SEE IF THE OPTION IS CONNECTED TO THE PRINTER 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the printer from the wall outlet 3 Checkthe connection between the option and the printer MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS INSTALLED Print a menu settings page and check to see if the option is listed in the Installed Options list If the option is not listed then reinstall it MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS AVAILABLE IN THE PRINTER DRIVER It may be necessary to manually add the option in the printer driver to make it available for print jobs For more information see Updating available options in the printer driver on page 41 MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS SELECTED From the program you are using select the option Mac OS 9 users should make sure the printer is set up in the Chooser
302. printer chooses between portrait and Landscape landscape Portrait Paper Saver Border Prints a border around each page image when using Paper Saver None Note None is the factory default setting Solid Staple Job Specifies whether printed output is stapled Off Note This menu item only appears if the printer is equipped with a stapler On Hole Punch Specifies whether printed output has punched holes Off Note This menu item only appears if the printer is equipped with a puncher On Hole Punch Mode Determines the type of punch finishing performed on a printed output 2 holes Notes 3 holes 4 holes 3 holes is the US factory default setting 4 holes is the international factory default setting This menu item only appears if the printer is equipped with a puncher Offset Pages Offsets pages at certain instances None Between Copies Between Jobs Notes None is the factory default setting Between Copies offsets each copy of a print job if Collate is set to On If Collate is set to Off each set of printed pages are offset such as all page 1 s and all page 2 s Between Jobs sets the same offset position for the entire print job regardless of the number of copies printed This menu item only appears if a stapler option is installed Understanding printer menus 207 Quality menu Menu item Print Mode Color Black Only Description Specifies whether images are printed in color or in black and white Note Colo
303. printer setup eee seen nenne 19 ltStal lin Noel isapisBereud e E NER 19 Order of installati csse sprint nta nei ean i ivutaste ons ac Ene niei niei rds 37 installing optional trays Ne E OE TE TENERE 37 Attaching table ceret tasted olurer Edad I mulam qiemiinesdbateni i i ped 38 Verifying printers BLUE sad pH RE POESIE NUMMORUM DR HE ERORNONOUFUR DID UU PD ERN 39 Setting Ua Che printer SOMWANE sisse ODD qt hd dE UR iR Bb DUO DN do ERN 40 Setting up wireless DERE uo viekpl ane e neto terr utin itti sotu coute tes bel eden ravi a repone rts perte 41 Installing the printer on a wired network eee eese reete trente tenons tnnttn tata tesa tta tos tta stostostis 47 Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port sss 49 unes ooo oe 50 Setting up and using the home screen applications 52 Making the home screen applications work for YOU sssssssscssscssecssccsseenscssecenscsseeesecsseesecsseessecssecuseenceneecsseeuses 52 Configuring Forms arid Favollt essi ax eti iiiar eu Verte PD n p E E v UM Moe aian 52 Configuring Scan to NetWOF siii ner PL R i toe thing pipi REV HEU Re E Rr ERE FERE rri rra bre E EHE tub ROC MIR Me MEER dE 54 Exporting and importing a configuration using the Embedded Web Server sss 55 Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 56 Savinj paper pd CODE ieu oae RR p Hh Ga ana
304. printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size it feeds from the default paper source Troubleshooting 258 Cancel the print job Load Manual Feeder with custom type namel Try one or more of the following Load the specified paper in the multipurpose feeder Touch Prompt each page paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size then it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size then it prints from the default paper source Cancel the print job Load Manual Feeder with custom string Try one or more of the following Load the specified paper in the multipurpose feeder Touch Prompt each page paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing If the printerfinds a tray that has the correct paper type and size then it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size then it prints from the default paper source Cancel the print job Load Manual Feeder with Isizel Try one or more of the following Loadthe specified paper in the multipurpose feeder Touch Prompt each page paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size then i
305. pts can be made before users are locked out Settings range from 1 60 minutes 5 minutes is the factory default setting Lockout time specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the login failures limit Settings range from 1 60 minutes 5 minutes is the factory default setting 1indicates the printer does not impose a lockout time Panel Login Timeout specifies how long the printer remains idle on the Home screen before automatically logging the user off Settings range from 1 900 seconds 30 seconds is the factory default setting Remote Login Timeout specifies how long a remote interface remains idle before automatically logging the user off Settings range from 1 120 seconds 10 minutes is the factory default setting Security Reset Jumper Access controls No Security No Effect Reset factory security defaults Changes the value of the security settings Notes Access controls No Security retains all the security information that the user has defined No Security is the factory default setting No Effect means the reset has no effect on the device s security configuration Reset factory security defaults deletes all security information that the user has defined and assigns the factory default value to each setting in the Miscellaneous Security Settings section of both the panel and the Web page LDAP Certificate Verification Demand Try Allow Never Allows the user to request a se
306. py of a printjobif Collate is set to On If Collate is set to Off a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages such as after all page 1 s and after all page 2 s Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document Separator Source Tray x Manual Feeder Specifies the paper source for separator sheets Notes Tray 1 standard tray is the factory default setting Fromthe Paper menu Configure MP must be set to Cassette for Multi Purpose Feeder to appear as a menu setting Understanding printer menus 206 Menu item Description Paper Saver Specifies that multiple page images be printed on one side of a paper Off Notes 2 Up 3 Up Offisthe factory default setting 4 Up The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side 6 Up 9 Up 12 Up 16 Up Paper Saver Ordering Specifies the positioning of multiple page images when using Paper Saver Horizontal Reverse Horizontal Reverse Vertical Notes Horizontal is the factory default setting Vertical Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation Paper Saver Orientation Specifies the orientation of a multiple page document Auto Note Auto is the factory default setting The
307. r such as a corporate logo The printed page appears tinted Can I adjust the color Sometimes a printed page may appear tinted for example everything printed seems to be too red This can be caused by environmental conditions paper type lighting conditions or user preference In these instances adjust the Color Balance setting to create a more preferable color Color Balance provides the user with the ability to make subtle adjustments to the amount of toner being used in each color plane Selecting positive or negative values for cyan magenta yellow and black from the Color Balance menu will slightly increase or decrease the amount of toner used for the chosen color For example if a printed page has a red tint then decreasing both magenta and yellow could potentially improve the color balance My color transparencies seem dark when they are projected Is there anything can do to improve the color This problem most commonly occurs when projecting transparencies with reflective overhead projectors To obtain the highest projected color quality transmissive overhead projectors are recommended If a reflective projector must be used then adjusting the Toner Darkness setting to 1 2 or 3 will lighten the transparency Make sure to print on the recommended type of color transparencies What is manual color correction When manual color correction is enabled the printer employs user selected color conversion tables to process ob
308. r where it is exposed to high temperatures Storing paper unwrapped in hot humid cold or dry conditions even in the trays can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding problems Smoothness Paper smoothness directly affects print quality If paper is too rough the toner cannot fuse to it properly If paper is too smooth it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points however smoothness between 150 and 200 Sheffield points produces the best print quality Moisture content The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period Grain direction Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper Grain is either grain long running the length of the paper or grain short running the width of the paper For 60 to 135 g m 16 to 36 Ib bond paper grain long paper is recommended For papers heavier than 135
309. r and printer at the same time Note Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer s authorized replacement A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce risk of fire use only the telecommunications RJ 11 cord provided with this product or a UL Listed 26 AWG or larger replacement when connecting this product to the public switched telephone network CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Make sure that all external connections such as Ethernet and telephone system connections are properly installed in their marked plug in ports This product is designed tested and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific manufacturer s components The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious The manufacturer is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Do not cut twist bind crush or place heavy objects on the power cord Do n
310. r is the factory default setting Color Correction Auto Off Manual Adjusts the color output on the printed page Notes Auto is the factory default setting Auto applies different color conversion tables to each object on the printed page e Off turns off color correction Manual allows customization of the color tables using the settings available from the Manual Color menu Duetothe differences in additive and subtractive colors certain colors that appear on computer monitors are impossible to duplicate on the printed page Print Resolution 4800 CQ 1200 dpi Toner Darkness 1 5 Specifies the printed output resolution Note 4800 CQ is the factory default setting Lightens or darkens the printed output Notes 4isthe factory default setting Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner f Print Mode is set to Black Only then a setting of 5 increases toner density and darkness to all print jobs f Print Mode is set to Color then a setting of 5 is the same as a setting of 4 Enhance Fine Lines Off On Enables a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings maps electrical circuit diagrams and flow charts Notes e Offis the factory default setting You can set this option from the software program For Windows users click File gt Print gt Properties gt Preferences gt Options or Setup For Macintosh users choose File gt Print and then adjust the se
311. r off 2 Hold down BA and EI while turning the printer on It takes approximately a minute to boot into the Configuration menu Once the printer is fully on the touch screen should display a list of functions instead of standard home screen icons such as Copy or Fax 3 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears 4 Touch Disk Encryption gt Enable Warning Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk 5 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task After the disk has been encrypted the printer will return to the Enable Disable screen Warning Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process Doing so may result in loss of data Note Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping and encryption A status bar will indicate the progress of the encryption task 6 Touch Back and then Exit Config Menu The printer will power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Securing the printer hard disk and other installed memory 221 Maintaining the printer Periodically certain tasks are required to maintain optimum print quality Cleaning the exterior of the printer 1 Make sure that the printer
312. r port information Secondary SMTP Gateway Image Format Specifies the image type for scan to fax PDF pdf XPS xps TIFF tif Content Type Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to fax Text Notes Text Photo Graphics Textis the factory default setting Text is used when the content of the original Photo document is mostly text or line art Text Photo is used when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Graphics is used when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Photo is used when the document being scanned is mostly a photo or an image Understanding printer menus 187 Content Source Color Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press Other Menu item Description Specifies how content will be produced Notes Color Laser is the factory default setting Color Laser is used when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White is used when the original document was printed using a black white laser printer Inkjet is used when the original document was printed using a inkjet printer Photo Film is used when the original document is a photo from film Magazine is used when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper is used when the original document is from a newspaper Press is used when the original document was printed using a printing press Other is use
313. r prints satisfactorily 88 xx Color cartridge very low The specified print cartridge is very low 1 For instructions on replacing a print cartridge from the printer control panel touch More Information 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 88 xx Color cartridge critically low The specified print cartridge is critically low 1 For instructions on replacing a print cartridge from the printer control panel touch More Information 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 840 01 Scanner disabled by admin Print without the scanner or contact your system support person 840 02 Scanner disabled Contact system administrator if problem persists The printer identified a problem with the scanner and automatically disabled it Try one or more of the following 1 Remove all pages from the ADF 2 Turn the printer off 3 Wait for 15 seconds and then turn the printer on Note If turning the printer off and then on again does not clear the message then touch Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen and then contact your system support person 4 Place the document in the ADF and then adjust the paper guides 5 From the home screen touch Copy or use the keypad to enter the number of copies 6 Change the copy settings as needed 7 Touch Copy It 1565 Emulation error load emulation option The printer automatically clears the message in 30 seconds and then disables the
314. r the multipurpose feeder last Note Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the chosen preprinted letterhead is acceptable for laser printers A Tips on using transparencies Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities Feed transparencies from the multipurpose feeder only From the Paper menu set the MP Feeder Type to Transparency Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers Transparencies must be able to withstand temperatures of 230 C 446 F without melting discoloring offsetting or releasing hazardous emissions To prevent print quality problems avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies Before loading transparencies flex the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together We recommend Lexmark transparencies For ordering information see the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com Tips on using envelopes Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure that the envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 220 C 446 F without sealing wrinkling curling excessively or releasing hazardous emissions For best performance use envelopes made from 90 g m 24 Ib bond paper or 2596 cotton All cotton envelopes must not exceed 70 g m 20 Ib bond weight Us
315. r the recipient s telephone number or shortcut number or search the address book Note To place a dial pause within a fax number press The dial pause appears as a comma in the Fax to box Use this feature if you need to dial an outside line first 5 Touch Fax It Sending a fax using the computer Faxing from a computer lets you send electronic documents without leaving your desk This gives you the flexibility of faxing documents directly from software programs Note In order to perform this function from your computer you must use the PostScript printer driver for your printer 1 From your software program click File gt Print 2 From the Print window select your printer and then click Properties gt Other Options gt Fax gt OK gt OK Faxing 114 3 Onthe Fax screen enter the name and number of the fax recipient 4 Click Send Creating shortcuts Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server Instead of entering the entire phone number of a fax recipient on the printer control panel each time you want to send a fax you can create a permanent fax destination and assign a shortcut number A shortcut can be created to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports
316. ray 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Size setting 2 Before sending the print job specify the correct size setting For Windows users specify the paper size from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the paper size from the Page Setup dialog Close paper transport cover Close the paper transport unit cover or door Close left side door Close the left side door of the printer Close Itrayl door Close the specified tray door Close finisher side door Close the side door of the finisher Close finisher top cover Close the top cover of the finisher Close front door Close the front door of the printer Close top access cover Close the specified door or cover Disk corrupted The printer attempted a hard disk recovery on a corrupted hard disk and the hard disk cannot be repaired The hard disk must be reformatted Touch Format disk to reformat the printer hard disk and clear the message Note Formatting deletes all the files stored on the printer hard disk Troubleshooting 255 Disk near full Securely clearing disk space Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Delete fonts macros and other data stored on the printer hard disk Install a hard disk with higher capacity Disk problem The printer hard disk must be reformatted Touch Format disk to reformat the printer hard disk and clear the message
317. ray drawer and feeder assignments to the factory default settings Yes L No HTML menu Font Name Joanna MT Sets the default font for HTML documents Albertus MT Letter Gothic Note The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not Antique Olive Lubalin Graph specify a font Apple Chancery Marigold Arial MT Monalisa Recut Avant Garde Monaco Bodoni New CenturySbk Bookman New York Chicago Optima Clarendon Oxford Cooper Black Palatino Copperplate StempelGaramond Coronet Taffy Courier Times Eurostile TimesNewRoman Garamond Univers Geneva Zapf Chancery Gill Sans NewSansMTCS Goudy NewSansMTCT Helvetica New SansMTJA Hoefler Text NewSansMTKO Intl CG Times Intl Courier Intl Univers ss Menu item Description Font Size Sets the default font size for HTML documents 1 255 pt Notes 12 ptis the factory default setting Font size can be increased in 1 point increments Scale Scales the default font for HTML documents 1 400 Notes 100 is the factory default setting Scaling can be increased in 1 increments Understanding printer menus 215 Menu item Description Orientation Sets the page orientation for HTML documents Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Margin Size Sets the page margin for HTML documents 8 255 mm Notes e 19 mmis the factory default setting Margin size can be increased in 1 mm increments Backgrounds Specifies
318. ray out Notice the size indicators on the bottom of the tray Use these indicators to help position the length and width guides Loading paper and specialty media 63 2 Squeeze and then slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading 3 Squeeze and then slide the length guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading Note The length guide has a locking device To unlock push the button on top of the length guide backward To lock push the button forward when a length has been selected 4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 5 Loadthe paper stack with the recommended print side faceup Loading paper and specialty media 64 Notes Place print side facedown for duplex printing Place pre punched paper with the holes toward the front of the tray e Place letterheads faceup with the header on the left side of the tray e Place letterheads facedown with the header on the right side of the tray for duplex printing Make sure the paper is below the maximum fill line located on the edge of the paper tray Overloading the tray can cause paper jams and possible printer damage 6 Insert the tray 7 From the printer control panel verify the Paper Size and Paper Type for the tray based on the paper you loaded Loading paper and specialty media 65 Loading the 2000 sheet high
319. rays the printer scales each copy to fit loaded paper Copies This option allows you to set the number of copies to be printed Scale This option creates an image from your copy that is proportionally scaled anywhere between 25 and 400 Scale can also be set for you automatically When you want to copy from one size of paper to another such as from legal size to letter size paper setting the Copy from and Copy to paper sizes automatically changes the scale to keep all the original document information on your copy Touch the left arrow to decrease the value by 196 touch the right arrow to increase the value by 196 Hold your finger on an arrow to make a continuous increment change Hold your finger on an arrow for two seconds to cause the pace of the change to accelerate Copying 98 Darkness This option adjusts how light or dark your copies will turn out in relation to the original document Sides Duplex Use this option to select duplex settings You can print copies on one or two sides make two sided copies duplex of two sided original documents make two sided copies from one sided original documents or make one sided copies simplex from two sided original documents Collate This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document The factory default setting for Collate is on the output pages of your copies will be ordered 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
320. recognition OCR forms In some cases registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms Coated papers erasable bond synthetic papers thermal papers Rough edged rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers Recycled papers that fail EN12281 2002 European testing Paper weighing less than 60 g m 16 Ib Multiple part forms or documents For more information about Lexmark visit www lexmark com General sustainability related information can be found at the Environmental Sustainability link Paper and specialty media guidelines 75 Storing paper Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality For best results store paper where the temperature is 21 C 70 F and the relative humidity is 40 Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18 to 24 C 65 to 75 F with relative humidity between 40 and 60 Store paper in cartons when possible on a pallet or shelf rather than on the floor Store individual packages on a flat surface Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages Supported paper sizes types and weights The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper input sources and the types of paper they support Note To use a paper size that is unlisted configure a Universal Paper Size Supported paper sizes Measurements apply to simplex one sided
321. refers to the height of the characters in the font One point equals approximately 1 72 of an inch Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0 25 point increments PCL Emulation Settings Specifies the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts Pitch Notes 0 08 100 10 is the factory default setting Pitch refers to the number of fixed space characters per inch cpi Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0 01 cpi increments For non scalable monospaced fonts the pitch appears on the display but cannot be changed PCL Emulation Settings Specifies the orientation of text and graphics on a page Orientation Notes Portrait a f Landscape Portrait is the factory default setting Portrait prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the page Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page PCL Emulation Settings Specifies the number of lines that print on each page Lines per Page Notes 1 255 60 is the US factory default setting 64 is the international default setting Theprintersets the amount of space between each line based on the Lines per Page Paper Size and Orientation settings Select the desired Paper Size and Orientation before setting Lines per Page Understanding printer menus 213 PCL Emulation Settings A4 Width 198 mm 203 mm Menu item Description Sets the printer to print on A4 size paper Notes 198 mm is the factory default setti
322. rencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass Using the scanner glass Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Scan or copy documents up to 215 x 355 mm 8 5 x 14 in Copy books up to 25 mm 1 in thick Learning about the printer 12 Using the security lock feature The printer is equipped with a security lock feature When a lock compatible with most laptop computers is attached the printer is locked Once locked the metal plate and the system board cannot be removed Attach a security lock to the printer in the location shown Learning about the printer 13 Understanding the printer control panel 1 3 1 Display Item Description Lets you view scanning copying faxing and printing options as well as status and error messages 2 Indicator light Off The power is off Blinking green The printer is warming up processing data or printing Solid green The printer is on but idle Blinking red Operator intervention is needed 3 Sleep Activates Sleep Mode or Hibernate Mode The following are the statuses of the indicator light and the Sleep button Entering or waking from Sleep Mode The indicator light is illuminated solid green Sleep button is unilluminated Operating in Sleep Mode The indicator light is illuminated solid green Sleep button is illuminated solid amber
323. requirements of EN 60950 Radio interference notice Warning Thisis a productthat complies with the emission requirements of EN55022 Class A limits and immunity requirements of EN55024 This product is not intended to be used in residential domestic environments This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Notice to users of the US telephone network FCC requirements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments ACTA On the back of this equipment is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAEQIHETXXXX If requested this number must be provided to your telephone company This equipment uses the RJ 11C Universal Service Order Code USOC jack A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant See your setup documentation for more information The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line Excessive RENs on a telephone line may r
324. ring 72 Custom Names menu 143 custom paper type name creating 72 Custom Scan Sizes menu 144 Custom Type x changing name 72 changing paper type 72 Custom Types menu 143 D date and time fax setting 113 daylight savings time faxing 114 Default Source menu 134 destination adding 54 deleting 54 editing 54 different paper sizes copying 93 directory list printing 85 disk wiping 219 Disk Wiping menu 162 display troubleshooting display is blank 270 display shows only diamonds 270 display printer control panel 14 adjusting brightness 59 disposing of printer hard disk 218 distinctive ring service fax connecting to 112 documents printing from Macintosh 79 from Windows 79 duplexing 93 Eco Mode setting 57 Edit Security Setups menu 160 email sending using the touch screen 103 Embedded Web Server accessing 237 administrator settings 237 checking printer status 237 checking supplies 228 creating a fax destination shortcut 115 creating an FTP shortcut 123 creating e mail shortcuts 102 functions 237 initial fax setup 109 networking settings 237 problem accessing 304 setting up e mail alerts 238 using 237 Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide where to find 237 emission notices 308 309 311 312 315 316 Empty the hole punch box 256 encrypting the printer hard disk 221 enlarging a copy 94 envelopes loading in multipurpose feeder 68 tips on using 80 environmental settings brightness adjusting 59 conserv
325. rint jobs reside on the printer RAM or printer hard disk then the expiration time for those print jobs does not change to the new default value e Ifthe printer is turned off all confidential jobs held in printer RAM are deleted Disk Wiping menu Disk Wiping erases only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by the file system All permanent data on the printer hard disk are preserved such as downloaded fonts macros and held jobs Note This menu item appears only if a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed Menu item Description Wiping Mode Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file system Off from the printer hard disk All permanent data on the printer hard disk is preserved Auto such as downloaded fonts macros and held jobs Manual Notes e Off is the factory default setting e Duetothe large amount of resources required for Automatic Wiping activating this option may decrease printer performance especially if the printer requires hard disk space faster than it can be wiped and returned to service Manual Wiping Manual Wiping overwrites all disk space that has been used to hold data from a Do not start now print job that has been processed printed This type of wipe does not erase any Start now information related to an unprocessed print job Notes Do not start now is the factory default setting e f the Di
326. rinter enters Sleep mode the printer control panel display and the standard exit bin lights are turned off e f scanning is supported then the scanner lamps are activated only when a scan job is started Energy Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy mode and Paper mode Paper Enable the automatic duplex feature Turn off print log features e Reducing printer noise To select a Quiet Mode setting using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Quiet Mode gt select a setting gt Submit Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 57 Choose To Off Use factory default settings This setting supports the Note Selecting Photo from the driver may disable Quiet performance specifications of your printer Mode and provide better print quality and full speed printing On Reduce printer noise Print jobs will process at a reduced speed Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print There will be a short delay before the first page is printed f your printer has faxing capability fax sounds ar
327. ropout Color Dropout Description Specifies which color to drop during scanning and how much to increase or decrease the dropout None Notes Red Geen None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout Blue 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Contrast Specifies the contrast of the output 0 5 Note Best for content is the factory default setting Best for content Mirror Image Creates a mirror image of the original document Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Negative Image Creates a negative image of the original document Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Shadow Detail Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image 4to4 Note 0 is the factory default setting ADF Skew Fix Specifies whether or not to fix slight skew on the scanned image Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Scan edge to edge Off Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge to edge Note Off is the factory default setting On Sharpness Adjusts the amount of sharpness of a scanned image 1 5 Note 3 is the factory default setting Temperature Enables the user to specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer Ato4 output than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default Understan
328. round all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan Scanning to an FTP address 126 Scanning to a computer or flash drive ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine L clippings The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive The computer does not have to be directly connected to the printer for you to receive Scan to PC images You can scan the document back to the computer over the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the printer Scanning to a computer 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Click Scan Profile Create Select your scan settings and then click Next Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scanned output file Uu 5 W N Enter a scan name The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display 6 Cli
329. rtain printer settings or tasks you may be able to reduce your printer s impact even further This chapter outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit Saving paper and toner Studies show that as much as 80 of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage You can significantly reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions such as printing on both sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper For information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting see Using Eco Mode Using recycled paper As an environmentally conscious company Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for use in laser printers For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer see Using recycled paper and other office papers on page 74 Conserving supplies Use both sides of the paper If your printer model supports duplex printing you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the paper by selecting 2 sided printing from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by selecting a setting from the Multipage printing N Up section of the Print dialog screen Check your first dra
330. rver certificate Notes e Demand means a server certificate is requested If a bad certificate is provided orif no certificate is provided the sessionis terminated immediately Demand is the factory default setting e Try means a server certificate is requested If no certificate is provided the session proceeds normally If a bad certificate is provided the session is terminated immediately Allow means a server certificate is requested If no certificate is provided the session proceeds normally If a bad certificate is provided it will be ignored and the session proceeds normally Never means no server certificate is requested Minimum PIN Length 1 16 Limits the digit length of the PIN Note 4 is the is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 161 Confidential Print menu Menu item Description Max Invalid PIN Limits the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered Off Notes 2 10 e Off is the factory default setting This menu item appears only if a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed Oncethe limit is reached the print job for that user name and that PIN are deleted Job Expiration Limits the amount of time a confidential print job stays in the printer before it is Off deleted 1 hour Notes AE e Offis the factory default settin Sa ours is the factory default setting Poe e If the Job Expiration setting is changed while confidential p
331. ry default setting Auto Configuration On Off Specifies whether the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6 address configuration entries provided by a router Note On is the factory default setting Set Hostname Lets you set the hostname View Address Note These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web View Router Address Server Enable DHCPv6 On Off Enables DHCPv6 in the printer Note On is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 151 Wireless menu Use the following menu items to view or configure the wireless internal print server settings Note This menu is available only for models connected to a wireless network The Wireless menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network x gt Standard Network Setup or Network x Setup gt Wireless Menu item Description WPS PBC Mode Lets you connect the printer to a wireless network by pressing buttons on both the printer and the access point wireless router within a given period of time WPS PIN Mode Lets you connect the printer to a wireless network by using a PIN on the printer and entering it into the wireless settings of the access point WPS Auto Detect Automatically detects the connection method that an access point with Disable WPS uses WPS Push Button Configuration PBC or WPS Personal Enable Identification Number PIN Note Disa
332. s The subject box has a limitation of 255 characters The message box has a limitation of 512 characters E mail Server Setup Send me a copy Never appears On by default Off by default Always On Sends a copy of the e mail back to the sender Note Never appears is the factory default setting E mail Server Setup Max E mail size 0 65535 KB Specifies the maximum e mail size in kilobytes Note E mails above the specified size are not sent E mail Server Setup Size error message Sends a message when an e mail is greater than the configured size limit E mail Server Setup Limit destinations Specifies a domain name such as a company domain name and then limits e mail destinations to that domain name only Notes E mail can be sent only to the specified domain The limit is one domain Understanding printer menus 189 Menu item E mail Server Setup Description Defines the e mail server path name for example directory path Web Link Setup Note The characters lt gt are invalid entries for a path name Server Login Password Path Base file name Web Link Format Specifies the format of the scanned file PDF pdf Note PDF pdf is the factory default setting Secure PDF TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps PDF Version Sets the version of the PDF file that will be scanned for e mailing 15 Note 1 5 is the factory default setting 1 6 A la 1 2 1 3 1 4
333. s do notimply that the manufacturer intends to make these available in all countries in which it operates Any reference to a product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only that product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products programs or services except those expressly designated by the manufacturer are the user s responsibility For Lexmark technical support visit support lexmark com For information on supplies and downloads visit www lexmark com If you don t have access to the Internet you can contact Lexmark by mail Lexmark International Inc Bldg 004 2 CSC 740 New Circle Road NW Lexington KY 40550 USA O 2010 Lexmark International Inc All rights reserved Notices 506 UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RIGHTS This software and any accompanying documentation provided under this agreement are commercial computer software and documentation developed exclusively at private expense Trademarks Lexmark Lexmark with diamond design MarkNet and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International Inc registered in the United States and or other countries PrintCryption and ScanBack are trademarks of Lexmark International Inc Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the
334. serial or communication COM port you will need to configure the printer and the computer so they can communicate Make sure you have connected the serial cable to the COM port on your printer 1 Setthe parameters in the printer a From the printer control panel navigate to the menu with port settings b Locate the submenu with serial port settings c Make any necessary changes to the serial settings d Savethe new settings and then print a menu settings page 2 Install the printer driver a Insert the Software and Documentation CD Wait for the Welcome screen to appear If the CD does not launch after a minute then do the following 1 Click or click Start and then click Run 2 Inthe Start Search or Run box type D setup exe where Dis the letter of your CD or DVD drive b Click Custom Install and then follow the instructions on the computer screen From the Configure Printer Connection dialog select Connect through a port discovered on your computer and then select a port d Ifthe port is not on the list then click Refresh or navigate to Add port select a port type enter necessary information OK e Click Continue 1 If you want to add another printer then click Add Another 2 Ifyou want to make changes then select a printer and then click Edit 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen f ClickFinish 3 Setthe COM port parameters After installing the printer driver set the serial parameters in the COM port
335. sh drive into the USB port on the front of the printer The USB Drive home screen appears 4 Select the destination folder and then touch Scan to USB drive 5 Adjust the scan settings 6 Touch Scan It Understanding the Scan Center features The Scan Center software lets you modify scan settings and select where to send the scanned output Scan settings modified with the Scan Center software can be saved and used for other scan jobs The following features are available Scan and send images to your computer Convert scanned images to text Preview the scanned image and adjust the brightness and contrast Make larger scans without losing detail Scan two sided documents Using the ScanBack Utility You can use the Lexmark ScanBack Utility instead of the Embedded Web Server to create scan to PC profiles The ScanBack Utility is on the Software and Documentation CD 1 Setup your scan to PC profile a Launch the ScanBack Utility b Select the printer you want to use If no printers are listed then contact your system support person to obtain a list or click Setup to manually search for an IP address or host name Scanning to a computer or flash drive 128 Follow the instructions on your computer screen to define the type of document being scanned and what kind of output you want to create d Make sure to select Show MFP Instructions if you want to view or print the final directions Create Shortcut i
336. sher Load src with custom type namel Try one or more of the following Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder Touch Paper loaded continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size it prints from the default paper source Cancel the print job Load src with custom string Try one or more of the following Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder Touch Paper loaded continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size it prints from the default paper source Cancel the print job Load src with size Try one or more of the following Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder Touch Paper loaded continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size it feeds from the default paper source e Cancel the print job Load src with type size Try one or more of the following Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder Touch Paper loaded continue to clear the message and continue
337. sign shortcut numbers when creating permanent fax destinations Permanent fax destinations or speed dial numbers are created in the Manage Shortcuts link located under Settings on the Embedded Web Server A shortcut number 1 99999 can contain a single recipient or multiple recipients By creating a group fax shortcut with a shortcut number you can quickly and easily fax broadcast information to an entire group 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not place postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Press and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad Using the address book The address book enables you to search for bookmarks and network directory servers Note If the address book feature is not enabled then contact your system support person 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax gt i gt Browse shortcuts 4 Using
338. sk Wiping access control is activated then a user must successfully authenticate and have the required authorization in order to initiate the disk wipe Understanding printer menus 162 Menu item Automatic Method Single pass Multiple pass Description Automatic wiping marks all disk space used by a previous print job and does not permit the file system to reuse this space until it has been cleared Only Automatic wiping enables users to activate disk wiping without having to turn the printer off for an extended amount of time Notes e Single pass is the factory default setting Highly confidential information should be wiped using only the Multiple pass method Manual Method Single pass Multiple pass Both manual and scheduled wiping allow the file system to reuse marked disk space without having to wipe it first Notes e Single pass is the factory default setting This menu item will not appear if Wiping Mode is set to Off or Auto Highly confidential information should be wiped using only the Multiple pass method Scheduled Method Single pass Multiple pass Both manual and scheduled wiping allow the file system to reuse marked disk space without having to wipe it first Notes Single pass is the factory default setting This menu item will not appear if Wiping Mode is set to Off or Auto Highly confidential information should be wiped using only the M
339. smission time for outgoing faxes Fine 200 dpi Note Standard is the factory default setting Super Fine 300 dpi Ultra Fine 600 dpi Understanding printer menus 180 Original Size Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned Mixed Sizes Note Mixed Sizes is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory Letter default setting Legal Executive Folio Statement Universal 4x6in 3xbin Business Card Custom Scan Size x A4 A5 Oficio Mexico A6 JIS B4 JIS B5 Book Original Auto Size Sense Sides Duplex Specifies how text and graphics are oriented on a page off Notes Long edge Short edge Offis the factory default setting Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape Shortedge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape Content Type Specifies the type of content that will be scanned for faxing Text Notes Text Photo Graphics Text is the factory default setting Text is used when the content of the original Photo document is mostly text or line art Text Photo is used when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Graphics is used when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Photo is used when the document being scanned is mostly a photo or an image
340. ss 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy Copying 93 4 From the Sides Duplex area touch the button for your preferred duplexing method The first number represents sides of the original documents the second number represents sides of the copy For example select 1 sided to 2 sided if you have 1 sided original documents and you want 2 sided copies 5 Touch and then Copy It Reducing or enlarging copies Copies can be reduced to 2596 of the original document size or enlarged to 40096 of the original document size The factory default setting for Scale is Auto If you leave Scale set to Auto the content of your original document will be scaled to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying To reduce or enlarge a copy 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy 4 From the Scale area touch the arrows to enlarge or reduce your copies Touching Copy to or Copy from after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto 5 Touch Copy It Adjusting copy quality 1 Load an original document faceu
341. stallation using Macintosh 44 installation using Windows 42 wireless network setup in Windows 42 wireless printer setup in Macintosh 44 X XPS menu 216 Index 335
342. streaks appear on transparencies or paper N A 7 FBC DHF DEF Try one or more of the following ENSURE THAT THE FILL PATTERN IS CORRECT If the fill pattern is incorrect choose a different fill pattern from your software program CHECK THE PAPER TYPE e Use only the recommended transparencies Ensure that the Paper Type setting matches what is loaded in the tray or feeder Ensure that the Paper Texture setting is correct for the type of paper or specialty media loaded in the tray or feeder Troubleshooting 297 MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER When 88 xx color cartridge low appears make sure the toner is distributed evenly within the print cartridge 1 Remove the print cartridge Warning Potential Damage Be careful notto touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs 2 Firmly shake the cartridge side to side and front to back several times to redistribute the toner 3 Reinsert the print cartridge If the problem continues the printer may need to be serviced For more information contact Customer Support Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints ABCDE meer ABCDE Try one or more of the following SELECT ANOTHER TRAY OR FEEDER From the printer control panel Paper Menu select Default Source For Windows users select the paper source from Print Properties For Macintosh users select the paper source from the Print dialog and
343. t Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Universal 4x6in 3xbin Business Card ID Card Custom Scan Size x A4 A5 Oficio Mexico JIS B4 JIS B5 Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes Notes Letter is the US factory default setting A4isthe international factory default setting Copy To Source Specifies the paper source for copy jobs Tray x Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Auto Size Match Manual Feeder Transparency Separators Places a sheet of paper between transparencies On Note On is the factory default setting Off Understanding printer menus 174 Separator Sheets None Between Copies Between Jobs Between Pages Menu item Description Places a sheet of paper between pages copies or jobs Note None is the factory default setting Page number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Custom text Separator Sheet Source Specifies the separator sheet source Tray x Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Manual Feeder Darkness Specifies the level of darkness for the copy job 1 9 Note 5 is the factory default setting Output Bin Specifies the exit bin to be used for the copy job Standard Bin Notes Bin x Standard Bin is the factory default setting Bin x only appears when at least one optional exit bin is installed Number of Copies Specifies the number of copies for the copy job 1 999 Note 1 is the fact
344. t came with the printer 2 Touch the application icon 3 Select the destination where you want to receive the scanned document Note After steps 2 or 3 you may be required to enter the user name and password used to access the printer depending on howthe printer and the particular destination are configured Contact your system support person for login information 4 Some additional job options may be available depending on how the application has been configured Follow the instructions on the screen to update the options Contact your system support person for more information on each option 5 Touch Scan It or Send It Depending on how the application has been configured you may have the option to preview and make adjustments to scanned pages Setting up and using the home screen applications 54 6 Toscanadditional documents load the next document into the scanner and select one of the following from the confirmation screen Touch Yes to same destination to scan the document to the previous destination Touch Yes to a different destination to scan the document to a different destination Touch No to finish the operation and return to the printer Home screen Exporting and importing a configuration using the Embedded Web Server You can export embedded solution configuration settings into a text file that can then be imported and used to apply the settings to one or more additional printers Exporting a configuration 1
345. t detect flash memory card 286 cannot detect printer hard disk 286 internal print server 287 Internal Solutions Port 286 memory card 287 option not working 284 paper tray problems 285 USB parallel interface card 287 troubleshooting scan cannot scan froma computer 278 partial document or photo scans 277 scan was not successful 276 scanner unit does not close 274 scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 276 U understanding the home screen buttons 15 uneven print density 301 unexpected page breaks 273 Universal Paper Size 144 setting 62 Universal Setup menu 144 unlinking trays 71 Unsupported USB device please remove 256 updating options in printer driver 41 USB port 38 USB parallel interface card troubleshooting 287 using Eco Mode 57 using Forms and Favorites 53 using Hibernate Mode 59 using Quiet Mode 57 using recycled paper 56 using the address book 103 using the Embedded Web Server 237 using the ScanBack Utility 128 Utilities menu 211 V verify print jobs 82 printing from a Macintosh computer 82 printing from Windows 82 viewing reports 238 viewing a faxlog 117 virtual display checking using Embedded Web Server 238 volatile memory 218 erasing 219 volatility statement of 218 W waste toner bottle ordering 230 replacing 234 wiping the hard disk 219 wired network setup using Macintosh 47 using Windows 47 Wireless menu 152 wireless network configuration information 41 in
346. t feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size then it prints from the default paper source Cancel the print job Load Manual Feeder with type size Try one or more of the following Load the specified paper in the multipurpose feeder Touch Prompt each page paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size then it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size then it prints from the default paper source Cancel the print job Load staples Try one or more of the following Replace the specified staple cartridge in the finisher Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Troubleshooting 259 Memory full cannot print faxes There is not enough memory to print the fax job Touch Continue to clear the message without printing Held faxes will attempt to print after the printer has been restarted Reattach bin x Try one or more of the following Turn the printer off and then back on Reattach the specified bin 1 Uu AWN 6 Turn the printer off Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Remove the specified bin Reattach the bin Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet Turn the printer back on Remove the specified bin
347. t loin des fen tres afin de garantir une protection optimale Si le mat riel ou son antenne d mission est install l ext rieur il doit faire l objet d une licence L installateur de cet quipement radio doit veiller ce que l antenne soit implant e et dirig e de mani re n mettre aucun champ HF d passant les limites fix es pour l ensemble de la population par Sant Canada Reportez vous au Code de s curit 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Sant Canada www hc sc gc ca rpb Le terme IC pr c dant le num ro de d accr ditation inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme aux sp cifications techniques d Industry Canada Notice to users in the European Union This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 2005 32 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and the ecodesign of energy using products Notices 516 Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hung ria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of
348. t operate correctly CHECK THE USB PARALLEL INTERFACE CARD CONNECTION Make sure the USB parallel interface card is securely connected to the printer system board CHECK THE CABLE Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected Solving paper feed problems Paper frequently jams These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER Use recommended paper and specialty media For more information see the chapter about paper and specialty media guidelines MAKE SURE THERE IS NOT TOO MUCH PAPER IN THE PAPER TRAY Make sure the stack of paper you load does not exceed the maximum stack height indicated in the tray or on the multipurpose feeder Troubleshooting 287 CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded THE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY Load paper from a fresh package Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared CHECK THE PAPER PATH The paper path is not clear Clear jammed paper from the entire paper path and then touch Continue Jammed pages are not reprinted TURN ON JAM RECOVERY 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Print Recovery 2 Touch the arrows nextto Jam Recovery until On or Auto appears 3 Touch Submit Solving print quality problems The information in the foll
349. takes too long or freezes the computer These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following OTHER SOFTWARE PROGRAMS MAY BE INTERFERING WITH SCANNING Close all programs not being used Troubleshooting 276 THE SCAN RESOLUTION MAY BE SET TOO HIGH Select a lower scan resolution Poor scanned image quality These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages THE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY Clean the scanner glass with a clean lint free cloth dampened with water For more information see Cleaning the scanner glass on page 223 ADJUST THE SCAN RESOLUTION Increase the resolution of the scan for a higher quality output CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Partial document or photo scans These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting For
350. te The printer does not verify the validity of the URL or network location Make sure that the location is entered correctly 4 Touch Submit Adding bookmarks using the Embedded Web Server 1 From the Embedded Web Server click Settings gt Solutions gt Embedded Solutions gt Forms and Favorites 2 Under the Bookmarks field choose Add Note You can also edit or delete a bookmark 3 Inthe Name field type a new bookmark name 4 From the Location list choose the protocol or specify if it is located in a network folder You may choose Network FTP HTTP or HTTPS 5 Inthe PIN field type a four digit number This field is optional and will require users to enter a PIN when printing the bookmark 6 Type the network address the network domain name the port or the URL based on the location of the bookmark specified in Step 4 7 Under Authentication Options select whether to require user authentication for this destination The credentials are used to access the network destination 8 Inthe sections that follow adjust the settings as necessary Select check boxes to allow users to modify settings Useradio buttons and drop down menus to specify the default settings 9 Click Apply to save the new bookmark Printing forms From the home screen navigate to Forms and Favorites gt select background to use gt select the form from the list gt enter the number of copies gt Submit Setting up and using the home screen
351. ter the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer disable or reduce the size of the USB serial and network buffers Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Job Buffering Off On Auto Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing Notes e Off is the factory default setting On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk Auto buffers print jobs only if the printeris busy processing data from another input port Changingthis setting from the printercontrol panel and then exiting themenus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Understanding printer menus 155 Menu item Advanced Status On Description Enables bidirectional communication through the parallel port Notes Off On is the factory default setting Off disables parallel port negotiation Protocol Specifies the parallel port protocol Fastbytes Notes Standard Fastbytes is the factory default setting It provides compatibility with most existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting Standard tries to resolve parallel port communication problems Honor Init Determines if the printer honors printer hardware initialization requests from the Off computer On Notes e Offis
352. ter then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors 1 Accessthe system board Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver 2 Unpack the card Note Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card Additional printer setup 25 3 Holding the card by its sides align the plastic pins on the card with the holes on the system board Plastic pins Metal pins 4 Push the card firmly into place Notes The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush against the system board Becareful not to damage the connectors 5 Reattach the system board cover Additional printer setup 26 Installing an Internal Solutions Port The system board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port ISP Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you hav
353. tes check our Web site at A k Configuring printer settings ntt py supportdexmanicson Viewing and printing documents and photos Setting up and using the printer software Configuring the printer on a network depending on your printer model Caring for and maintaining the printer Troubleshooting and solving problems Instructions for Networking Guide Open the Software and Installing the printer using Guided or Advanced wireless Documentation CD and then look for Printer and setup Software Documentation under the Pubs folder From gt thelist of publications clickthe Networking Guide link Connecting the printer to an Ethernet or a wireless network Troubleshooting printer connection problems Learning about the printer 9 What are you looking for Find it here Help using the printer software Windows or Mac Help Open a printer software program or application and then click Help Click to view context sensitive information Notes The Help installs automatically with the printer software The printer software is located in the printer Program folder or on the desktop depending on your operating system Latest supplemental information updates and technical Lexmark Support Web site support http support lexmark com Documentation Note Select yourcountry or region and then select your e Driver downloads product to view the appropriate support site Live c
354. that preprinting perforation and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper handling problems Printing 81 Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 190 C 374 F without releasing hazardous emissions e Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer Preprinting introduces semi liquid and volatile components into the printer Use grain short card stock when possible Printing confidential and other held jobs Storing print jobs in the printer You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer control panel All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs Note Confidential Verify Reserve and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs Print job type Description Confidential Confidential lets you hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the control panel Note The PIN is set from the computer It must be four digits using the numbers 0 9 Verify Verify lets you print one copy of a print job while the printer holds the remaining copies It allows you to examine if the first copy is satisfactory The print job is automatically deleted from the printer memory once all copies are printed Reserve
355. the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides Scanning to an FTP address 122 3 Press and then enter the FTP shortcut number 4 Touch Send It Scanning to an FTP address using the address book 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to FTP gt FTP gt amp enter the name of recipient gt Browse shortcuts gt name of recipient gt Done Creating shortcuts Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the printer control panel each time you want to send a document to an FTP server you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number There are two methods for creating shortcut numbers using a computer or using the printer touch screen Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you c
356. the factory default setting The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the parallel port Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the computer is turned on Parallel Mode 2 Determines if the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of a On strobe Off Note On is the factory default setting Mac Binary PS Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs Auto Notes On Off Auto isthe factory default setting Offfilters print jobs using the standard protocol On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs ENA Address Sets the network address information for an external print server YYY YYY YYY JYY Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port ENA Netmask Sets the netmask information for an external print server YYY YYY YYY YYY Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port ENA gateway Sets the gateway information for an external print server YYY YYY YYY YYY Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port A Understanding printer menus 156 Serial x menu Menu item Description PCL SmartSwitch Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received On through a
357. the factory default setting 5reduces the file size and quality of the image 90 provides the best image quality but the file size is very large This menu item applies to all scan functions Text Default Sets the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the image 5 90 Note 75 is the factory default setting Text Photo Default 5 90 Sets the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 75 is the factory default setting Photo Default 5 90 Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality ofthe image Note 50 is the factory default setting E mail images sent as Attachment Web Link Use Multi Page TIFF On Off Specifies how the images will be sent Note Attachment is the factory default setting Provides a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For amultiple page scan to e mail job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Notes Onisthe factory default setting This menu item applies to all scan functions Transmission Log Print log Do not print log Print only for error Specifies whether or not the transmission log prints Note Print log is the factory default setting Log Paper Source Tray x Manual Feeder Specifies the paper source for printing e mail logs Note Tra
358. the system board cage 11 Tighten the long thumbscrew Warning Potential Damage Do not overtighten the thumbscrew 12 Insert the plug of the ISP interface cable into the receptacle of the system board Note The plugs and receptacles are color coded Additional printer setup 30 13 Reattach the system board cover Installing a printer hard disk Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors 1 Accessthe system board For more information see Accessing the system board on page 20 2 Unpack the printer hard disk Additional printer setup 31 3 Locate the appropriate connector on the system board Note If an optional ISP is currently installed then the printer hard disk must be installed onto the ISP To install a printer hard disk onto the ISP a Using aflathead screwdriver loosen the screws EREE EEN b Remove the screws attac
359. ting from 84 Flash Drive menu 199 flash drives supported file types 83 flash memory card installing 25 troubleshooting 286 font sample list printing 85 forwarding faxes 121 FTP scanning using address book 123 FTP address creating shortcuts using the touch screen 124 FTP screen advanced options 126 options 124 125 FTP Settings menu 194 fuser or transfer module ordering 230 G General Settings menu 165 Green settings Eco Mode 57 Quiet Mode 57 green settings Hibernate Mode 59 H hard disk wiping 219 hard disk memory erasing 219 held jobs 82 printing from a Macintosh computer 82 printing from Windows 82 Help menu 217 Hibernate Mode using 59 holding faxes 120 home screen applications 52 customizing 52 home screen applications using 52 home screen buttons description 15 Index 328 HTML menu 215 Image menu 216 importing a configuration using the Embedded Web Server 55 importing a configuration using the Embedded Web Server 55 indicator light is blinking troubleshooting 252 initial fax setup 109 using the Embedded Web Server 109 Insert hole punch box 257 Insert staple cartridge 258 Install bin x 257 Install Tray x 257 installing a memory card 23 installing an Internal Solutions Port 27 installing on a wireless network using Windows 42 installing options order of installation 37 installing printer on wireless network 42 installing printer hard disk 31 installing printer on a network wired net
360. tive NIC Auto list of available network cards Notes e Auto is the factory default setting This menu item appears only if an optional network card is installed Standard Network or Network x menus Note Only active ports appear in this menu all inactive ports are omitted Understanding printer menus 147 Menu item PCL SmartSwitch On Off PS SmartSwitch On Off NPA Mode Auto Off Description Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes Onisthe factory default setting When Off is used the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes Onisthe factory default setting When Off is used the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Notes Auto is the factory default setting Changing this s
361. to or Graphic Text Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphic Use when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Faxing 118 e Text Photo Use when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos e Photo Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image Choose content source from Color Laser Black White Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press or Other Color Laser Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Use when the original document was printed using a black white laser printer Inkjet Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer Photo Film Use when the original document is a photo from film Magazine Use when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper Use when the original document is from a newspaper Press Use when the original document was printed using a printing press Other Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Resolution This options increases how closely the scanner examines the document you want to fax If you are faxing a photo a drawing with fine lines or a document with very small text increase the Resolution setting This will increase the amount of time required for the scan and will increase the quality of the fax output
362. to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off PS SmartSwitch Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received On through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes Onisthe factory default setting When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off NPA Mode Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional Auto communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol On Notes Off Auto is the factory default setting e Changingthissettingfromthe printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Parallel Buffer Auto 3KB to maximum size allowed Disabled Sets the size of the parallel input buffer Notes Auto isthe factory default setting Disabled turns off job buffering Any print jobs already buffered on the printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1 KB increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the prin
363. to be received by the printer On Note On is the factory default setting Off Rings to Answer Specifies the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job 1 25 Note 1 is the factory default setting Auto Reduction Scales an incoming fax job so thatit fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated On fax source Off Note On is the factory default setting Paper Source Specifies the paper source selected to supply paper for the printer to print an Auto incoming fax Tray x Multi Purpose Feeder Output Bin Specifies an output bin for received faxes Standard Bin Note Bin 1 is available only when the finisher is installed Bin 1 x Sides Duplex Enables duplex printing two sided printing for incoming fax jobs Off On Understanding printer menus 184 Separator Sheets None Before Job After Job Menu item Description Enables the printer to include separator sheets in the output Separator Sheet Source Tray x Manual Feeder Specifies where the printer will pick the separator sheet Fax Footer Off On Prints the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax Note Off is the factory default setting Max Speed 33600 2400 4800 9600 14400 Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received Fax Forwarding Print Print and Forward Forward Enables forwarding of received faxes to another recipient Forward to Fax E mail FTP LDSS eSF Specifies the
364. to the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy Advanced Options Header Footer 4 Pickan area of the page where you want to place the date and time 5 Touch Yes or No gt gt Copy It Placing an overlay message on each page An overlay message can be placed on each page The message choices are Urgent Confidential Copy Custom or Draft To place a message on the copies 1 Loadan original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Advanced Options gt Overlay gt select overlay message gt 4 Touch Copy It Canceling a copy job Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF When the ADF begins processing a document the scanning screen appears To cancel the copy job touch Cancel Job on the touch screen A Canceling scan job screen appears The ADF clears all pages in the ADF and cancels the job Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen A Canceling scan job screen appears Once the jo
365. tomer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected An appropriate AC surge arrestoris defined as one that is suitably rated and certified by UL Underwriter s Laboratories another NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory or a recognized safety certification body in the country region of use This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks Avis r serv aux utilisateurs du r seau t l phonique du Canada Ce produit est conforme aux sp cifications techniques d Industrie Canada Le num ro REN ringer equivalence number num ro d quivalence de sonnerie fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant tre connect s l interface t l phonique En bout de ligne le nombre d appareils qui peuvent tre connect s n est pas directement limit mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas d passer cinq Le num ro REN du modem est indiqu sur l tiquette produit situ e l arri re de l quipement Les compagnies de t l phone constatent que les surtensions lectriques en particulier celles dues la foudre entra nent d importants d g ts sur les terminaux priv s connect s a des sources d alimentation CA Il s agit l d un probl me majeur d chelle nationale En cons quence il vous est recommand de brancher un parasurtenseur dans la prise de courant
366. tons and shortcuts cannot be used while this appears Touching this button opens a password entry screen Enter the correct password to unlock the printer control panel Cancel Jobs Opens the Cancel Jobs screen The Cancel Jobs screen shows three headings Print Fax and Network The following items are available under the Print Fax and Network headings e Print job e Copy job Fax profile e FTP E mail send Each heading has a list of jobs shown in a column under it which can show only three jobs per screen If more than three jobs exist in a column then an arrow appears enabling you to scroll through the jobs Change Language Launches the Change Language pop up window that allows you to change the primary language of the printer Using the touch screen buttons Note Your screens and buttons may vary depending on your options and administrative setup Sample touch screen Copy from Sides Duplex Collate Letter 85x 11 in 12 d 12 12 bA Copy to Letter 8 5 x 11 in Plain Paper o 1 to 2 Sidod On Staple Punch Content Scale i Auto EK i 100 d d r Text Photo 3 Staples Left On Color Save as Shortcut Other Feature m uis Log Out Copies 999 a Options ime Function Submit Submits changes made in the printer settings Sample Copy Prints a sample copy Learning about the printer 16 Button Function Right arrow Scrolls to the right x Left
367. tor Uses only black toner to create all levels of neutral gray sRGB Vivid Provides an increased color saturation for the sRGB Display color correction Black usage is optimized for printing business graphics Off No color correction is implemented CMYK Image US CMYK Applies color correction to approximate the SWOP CMYK Text Specifications for Web Offset Publishing color output CMYK Graphics Euro CMYK Applies color correction to approximated EuroScale color output Vivid CMYK Increases the color saturation of the US CMYK color correction setting Off No color correction is implemented How can I match a particular color such as a corporate logo From the printer Quality menu nine types of Color Samples sets are available These are also available from the Color Samples page of the Embedded Web Server Selecting any sample set generates a multiple page printout consisting of hundreds of colored boxes Either a CMYK or RGB combination is located on each box depending on the table selected The observed color of each box is obtained by passing the CMYK or RGB combination labeled on the box through the selected color conversion table By examining Color Samples sets a user can identify the box whose color is the closest to the desired color The color combination labeled on the box can then be used for modifying the color ofthe object in a software program For more information see the software pr
368. tory default setting e Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs Standard Network Setup Displays and sets the printer network settings Reports Note The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless Network Card network TCP IP IPv6 Wireless AppleTalk Network x Setup Reports Network Card TCP IP IPv6 Wireless AppleTalk Network Reports menu This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network x gt Standard Network Setup or Network Setup gt Reports or Network Reports Menu item Description Print Setup Page Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address Network Card menu This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network x gt Standard Network Setup or Network x Setup gt Network Card Menu item Description View Card Status Lets you view the connection status of the network card Connected Disconnected View Card Speed Lets you view the speed of a currently active network card Understanding printer menus 149 View Network Address UAA LAA Menu item Description Lets you view the network addresses End of Job Timeout 0 255 Sets the amount of time in seconds before a network print job is canceled Notes 90 seconds
369. ts the number and complexity of images and the number of pages in the print job TURN OFF THE PAGE PROTECT SETTING From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Print Recovery gt Page Protect gt Off gt CHANGE THE ENVIRONMENTAL SETTINGS When using Eco Mode or Quiet Mode settings you may notice a reduction in performance Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type setting 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct type setting For Windows users specify the type from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the type from the Print dialog Incorrect characters print e Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode If Ready Hex appears on the display you must exit Hex Trace mode before you can print your job Turn the printer off and back on to exit Hex Trace mode Make sure the SmartSwitch settings are set to On in the Network and USB menus Tray linking does not work These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following LoAD THE SAME SIZE AND TYPE OF PAPER Load the same size and type of paper in each tray to be linked Move the paper guides to the correct positions for the paper size loaded in each tray Troubleshooting 272 Use THE SAME Paper Size AND PAPER TYPE SET
370. ttings General Settings 3 Inthe Screen Brightness field enter the brightness percentage you want for the display 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to Settings General Settings 2 Touch the arrows until Screen Brightness appears and then select a setting 3 Touch Submit Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 59 Setting the standard exit bin light To save energy you can dim or turn off the output lighting for the standard exit bin Available settings are Off Dim and Bright The factory default setting for Normal Standby Mode is Bright When Eco Mode is set to Energy or Energy Paper then the light setting is Dim When in Sleep Mode then the light is off Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings General Settings Output Lighting 3 From the Normal Standby Mode list select the light setting for the standard exit bin when in Ready or Standby mode 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to Settings General Settings Output Lighting 2 Touch the arrow b
371. ttings from the print dialog and pop up menus To set Enhance Fine Lines using the Embedded Web Server type the network printer IP address in a browser window Color Saver Reduces the amount of toner used for graphics and images The amount of toner used Off for text is not reduced On Notes e Offis the factory default setting On overrides Toner Darkness settings Understanding printer menus 208 Menu item RGB Brightness 6to6 Description Adjusts brightness in color outputs Notes Ois the factory default setting 6 is the maximum decrease 6 is the maximum increase This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used RGB Contrast Adjusts contrast in color outputs 0 5 Notes Ois the factory default setting This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used RGB Saturation Adjusts saturation in color outputs 0 5 Notes Ois the factory default setting This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used Color Balance Cyan 5to5 Magenta 5to5 Yellow 5to5 Black 5to5 Reset Defaults 0 Adjusts color in printed output by increasing or decreasing the amount of toner being used for each color Note 0 is the factory default setting Color Samples sRGB Display sRGB Vivid Display True Black Vivid Off RGB US CMYK Euro CMYK Vivid CMYK Off CMYK Prints sample pages for each of the RGB and
372. tup steps e f you want a digital connection such as ISDN DSL or ADSL then a third party device such as a DSL filter is required Contact your DSL provider for a DSL filter The DSL filter removes the digital signal on the telephone line that can interfere with the ability of the printer to fax properly e You do not need to attach the printer to a computer but you do need to connect it to an analog telephone line to send and receive faxes Equipment and service options Fax connection setup Connect directly to the telephone line See Connecting to an analog telephone line on page 110 Connect to a Digital Subscriber Line DSL or ADSL service See Connecting to a DSL service on page 110 Connect to a Private Branch eXchange PBX or Integrated See Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system on page 111 Services Digital Network ISDN system Use a Distinctive Ring service See Connecting to a distinctive ring service on page 112 Connect through an adapter used in your area See Connecting to an adapter for your country or region on page 112 Connecting to an analog telephone line If your telecommunications equipment uses a US style RJ11 telephone line then follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack Connectin
373. type of recipient to which faxes will be forwarded Note This item is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server Forward to Shortcut Lets you enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type Fax E mail FTP LDSS or eSF Block No Name Fax Off On Enables blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID specified Banned Fax List Enables the list of banned fax numbers stored in the printer Holding Faxes Held Fax Mode Off Always On Manual Scheduled Fax Holding Schedule Enables fax holding all of the time or according to a set schedule Note Off is the factory default setting Enable Color Fax Receive On Off Enables the device to receive fax in color Understanding printer menus 185 Fax Log Settings Transmission Log Print log Do not print log Print only for error Menu item Description Enables printing of a transmission log after each fax job Receive Error Log Print Never Print on Error Enables printing of a receive error log following a receive error Auto Print Logs Enables automatic printing of fax logs Manual Feeder On Note Logs print after every 200 jobs Off Log Paper Source Selects the source of the paper used for printing logs Tray x Logs Display Remote Fax Name or Remote Station Name Dialed Number Specifies whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name returned Enable Job Log
374. uch Continue to continue printing Turn the printer off wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on Upgrade flash the network firmware in the printer 54 Serial option x error Try one or more of the following Checkthat the serial cable is connected properly and is the correct one for the serial port Check that the serial interface parameters protocol baud parity and data bits are set correctly on the printer and on the host computer Touch Continue to continue printing Turn the printer power off and then back on to reset the printer 54 Standard network software error Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to continue printing Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer Upgrade flash the network firmware in the printer or print server 55 Unsupported option in slot x 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer system board and then replace it with a supported card 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Troubleshooting 264 56 Parallel port x disabled Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the parallel port Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled 56 Serial port x disabled Try one or more of the
375. ultiple pass method Scheduled wipes are initiated without displaying a user warning or confirmation message Security Audit Log menu Menu item Description Export Log Enables an authorized user to export the audit log Notes To export the audit log from the printer control panel a flash drive must be attached to the printer From the Embedded Web Server the audit log can be downloaded to a computer Delete Log Specifies whether audit logs are deleted Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No Understanding printer menus 163 Menu item Configure Log Enable Audit No Yes Enable Remote Syslog No Yes Remote Syslog Facility 0 23 Severity of events to log 0 7 Description Specifies whether and how audit logs are created Notes Enable Audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log and remote syslog No is the factory default setting Enable Remote Syslog determines if logs are sent to a remote server No is the factory default setting Remote Syslog Facility determines the value used to send logs to the remote syslog server 4 is the factory default setting With the security audit log activated the severity value of each event is recorded 4 is the factory default setting Set Date and Time menu Current Date and Time Menu item Description Lets you view the current date and time settings for the printer Manually Set Date
376. ut Best for content Note Best for content is the factory default setting 0 5 Mirror Image Creates a mirror image of the original document Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Negative Image Creates a negative image of the original document Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Shadow Detail Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a fax 4to4 Note 0 is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 183 ADF Skew Fix Specifies whether or not to fix slight skew on the scanned image Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Scan edge to edge Specifies if the original document is scanned edge to edge prior to faxing Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of a fax 0 5 Note 3 is the factory default setting Temperature Enables the user to specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer Ato4 output than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default Enable Color Fax Scans Enables color faxing Off by default Note Off by default is the factory default setting On by default Never use Always use Auto Convert Color Faxes to Converts all outgoing faxes to black and white Mono Faxes Note On is the factory default setting On Off a af Fax Receive Settings Menu item Description Enable Fax Receive Allows fax jobs
377. utton next to Normal Standby Mode to select the light settings for the standard exit bin when in Ready or Standby Mode 3 Touch Submit Recycling Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling For more information see The Notices chapter The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com environment The Lexmark recycling program at www lexmark com recycle Recycling Lexmark products To return Lexmark products for recycling 1 Visit our Web site at www lexmark com recycle 2 Find the product type you want to recycle and then select your country or region from the list 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 60 Recycling Lexmark packaging Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of These efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions energy savings and natural resource savings Lexmark cartons are 10096 recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist Facilities may not exist in your area The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist Facilities may not exist in your area When you return a cartridge to Lexmark you can reuse the box that the cartrid
378. vailable from the Paper Size Type menu Note To link the multipurpose feeder Configure MP must be set to Cassette in the Paper menu in order for MP Feeder Size to appear as a menu item The Paper Type setting must be set for all trays from the Paper Type menu available from the Paper Size Type menu Unlinking trays Note Trays that do not have the same settings as any other tray are not linked Change one of the following tray settings Paper Type Paper Type names describe the paper characteristics If the name that best describes your paper is used by linked trays assign a different Paper Type name to the tray such as Custom Type x or define your own custom name Paper Size Load a different paper size to automatically change the Paper Size setting for a tray Paper Size settings for the multipurpose feeder are not automatic they must be set manually from the Paper Size menu Warning Potential Damage Do not assign a Paper Type name that does not accurately describe the type of paper loaded ina tray The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified Paper Type Prints may not be properly processed if an inaccurate Paper Type is selected Loading paper and specialty media 71 Linking exit bins Link exit bins to create a single output source The printer automatically uses the next available bin as the output Source The standard exit bin holds up to 550 sheets of 20 Ib paper If you need additional output cap
379. vices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver 1 Open the cover 2 Remove the metal panel a Turn the screws on the panel counterclockwise to remove them Additional printer setup 20 b Shift the metal panel to the left to disengage the hooks then pull forward to remove it 3 Usethe following illustration to locate the appropriate connectors Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors EM LJ Memory card connector Firmware and flash memory card connectors Internal print server connector A W N Hard disk connector Additional printer setup 21 4 Reattach the system board cover Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors a Reinstall the hooks on the left side of the metal panel into the slots on the system board cage and then shift to the right Additional printer setup 22 b Align and then turn each screw clockwise to tighten c Close the cover Installing a memory card CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or insta
380. visory label A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown DANGER invisible imer rechation when cartridges are removed and mteriock defeated Avoid expovore to laser beam Perigo Enio inveiivel de laser quando os cartuchos s c removidos e a weve alerta Evite exposic o ao feixe Opecurost Nevidifeo unerako cradenye hada su hice utionane posdiama aqurecana veza 2begareat heperye 2 Pom Mebersed vyetyts revidteiteho keeran zieni ph oteranden karet a ochiohovant copatty Neveoromesfn s Fare Usynhg Guerstraling n r tonertansetseme fjerner og attaining oph ves Undga at komme kontakt med Pas op Oraichtbaee laserstrating ah cartridges werden verwijderd en vergrendeiing opes is Voorkom Blootsteling aan de stralen Danger Radirtiora irrenisies lors du retrait des cartouches t du dewerouliage des loquets Eviter toste exposition au rayon laser Vasa NMcymrtbn t lasersiteily on varottava kun whekasetit on poistettu ja fubtus on auki Vt sdeeelle althiturmesta Gehe Unsichtbare Laserstrahtung Beim Weraunnehmen von Drectharsetten und offeser Sichterheiisperre Laserstrahl maden Rius Atgern arwahan Mlp trav aqapana ci xon Ti es cias ripae n chanetie e Anapeyeu ww xfi om Silty tev aiv figyelem A karettak icowtelwkor lathatatias ezervegerces lephet fel a a baton kapciolo nem mokodit Keridpit of a lecenugarat Pericolo Emiswone di radiazioni imer durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blecco Evitare empowaion
381. w 268 269 88 xx color cartridge nearly low 268 Adjusting color 252 Index 331 anerrorhas occurred with the flash drive 252 an error has occurred with the USB drive 252 Change input src to custom type name load orientation 253 Change src to custom string 253 Change src to custom string load orientation 253 Change src to custom type name 253 Change src to size 254 Change src to size type 254 Change src to size type load orientation 254 Change src to size load orientation 254 Check src orientation or guides 255 Close tray door 255 Close finisher side door 255 Close finisher top cover 255 Close front door 255 Close left side door 255 Close paper transport cover 255 Close top access cover 255 Disk corrupted 255 Disk near full Securely clearing disk space 256 Disk problem 256 Empty the hole punch box 256 Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator 256 Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator 256 Fax Station Name not set up 257 Fax Station Number not set up 257 Insert hole punch box 257 Insert staple cartridge 258 Insert Tray x 258 Install bin x 257 Install Tray x 257 Load src with custom string 258 Load src with custom type name 258 Load src with size 258 Load src with type size 258 Load Manual Feeder with custom string 259 Load Manual Feeder with custom type name 25
382. whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents Print Note Print is the factory default setting Do Not Print Image menu Menu item Description Auto Fit Selects the optimal paper size scaling and orientation On Note On is the factory default setting It overrides scaling and orientation settings Off for some images Invert Inverts bi tonal monochrome images off Notes On e Off is the factory default setting This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images Scaling Scales the image to fit the selected paper size Best Fit Notes Anchor Center Fit Height Width BestFit is the factory default setting Fit Height When Auto Fit is set to On Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit Fit Width Anchor Top Left Orientation Sets the image orientation Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Rev Portrait Rev Landscape XPS menu Description Print Error Pages Prints a page containing information on errors including XML markup errors Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Understanding printer menus 216 Help menu The Help menu consists of a series of Help pages that are stored in the multifunction printer MFP as PDF files They contain information about using the printer and performing various tasks including copying scanning and faxing English French German and Spanish translations are stored in the printer Other translations are available on the Lexmark
383. within the following dimensions Width 89 mm 3 5 in to 229 mm 9 02 in Length 127 mm 5 in to 1270 mm 50 in Note Maximum width and length can be applied only to short edge feeding Note Do not add or remove paper or specialty media when the printer is printing from the multipurpose feeder or when the printer control panel indicator light is blinking Doing so may cause a jam 1 Pull down the multipurpose feeder door 2 Forpaperorspecialty media that is longer than letter size paper gently pull the extension until it is fully extended Loading paper and specialty media 68 3 Flexthe sheets of paper or specialty media back and forth to loosen them Do not fold or crease them Straighten the edges on a level surface Paper Envelopes Transparencies Note Avoid scratching or touching the print side Loading paper and specialty media 69 4 Pushthe paper picktab and then load the paper or specialty media Slide the stack gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop and then release the paper pick tab Warning Potential Damage Pulling the paper out without pushing the paper pick tab first may cause jams or the paper pick tab to break oad paper and transparencies with the recommended print side facedown and the short edge entering the printer first For duplex letterhead printing place the letterhead faceup and the header entering the printer last
384. working 47 installing printer on a wireless network using Macintosh 44 installing printer software adding options 41 installing the 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder 37 installing the 550 sheet tray 37 installing the printer software 40 internal print server troubleshooting 287 Internal Solutions Port changing port settings 49 installing 27 troubleshooting 286 IPv6 menu 151 isolating print quality problems 86 288 J jams avoiding 240 locating jam areas 240 locations 240 numbers 240 jams clearing 200 paper jam 242 201 paper jam 242 202 203 paper jams 243 230 paper jam 244 231 239 paper jams 245 24x paper jam 245 250 paper jam 246 280 289 paper jam 247 280 299 224 290 292 paper jams 248 400 403 paper jams 248 431 438 paper jams 249 455 staple jam 249 460 461 paper jams 248 L labels paper tips 81 letterhead copying on 91 loading 2000 sheet high capacity feeder 66 loading multipurpose feeder 79 loading trays 79 letterhead printing 79 light colored line white line or incorrectly colored line appears on prints 293 light indicator 14 linking exit bins 72 linking exit bins 72 linking trays 71 Load Manual Feeder with custom string 259 Load Manual Feeder with custom type name 259 Load Manual Feeder with size 259 Load Manual Feeder with type size 259 Load staples 259 loading 2000 sheet high capacity feeder 66 550 sheet tray standard or optional 63 letterhead in 2000 sheet high capacity
385. y 1 is the factory default setting Log Output Bin Standard Bin Bin x Specifies an exit bin for e mail logs Notes Standard Bin is the factory default setting Bin x only appears when at least one optional exit bin is installed E mail Bit Depth 8 bit 1 bit Enables the Text Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images when Color is set to Off Note 8 bit is the factory default setting Custom Job scanning Off On Lets you copy in a single copy job a document that contains mixed paper sizes Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 192 Menu item Scan Preview Off On Description Specifies whether or not a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Allow Save as Shortcut On Off Lets you save e mail addresses as shortcuts Notes On is the factory default setting When set to Off the Save as Shortcut button does not appear on the e mail Destination screen Background Removal 4to4 Adjusts the amount of background visible on a scanned image Note O is the factory default setting Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Enables an equal balance of colors in the output Color Dropout Color Dropout Specifies which color to drop during scanning and how much to increase or decrease the dropout None Notes Red Gre
386. y constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom s telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment associated with this device The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance to Telecom s specifications There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation and e The equipment shall go on hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next call attempt The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another South Africa telecommunications notice This modem must be used in conjunction with an approved surge protection device when connected to the PSTN Using this product in Switzerland This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter Lexmark part number 14B5109 or 80D1877 to be installed on any line which receives metering pulses in Switzerland The Lexmark filter must be used as metering pulses are present on all analog telephone lines in Switzerland Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse Cet appareil n cessite l utilisation d un filtre de tonalit de facturation suisse n de r f rence Lexmark 14B5109 ou 80D1877 devant tre install surtoute lig

User's Guide - 4 Office Technical Support

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents